{"title":"Salt","description":"","products":[{"product_id":"bernardo-ad-260-400v","title":"Bernardo AD 260 Planer and Thicknesser – 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 260 jointer and thicknesser offers a planing width of 250 mm, a jointer table of 1,090 mm, a Ø 75 mm cutter block with 3 HSS knives at 4,000 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 185 mm, a feed rate of 4.8 m\/min, and a 2.0 kW three-phase 400V motor. Manufactured in Austria, it is distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 250 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,090 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 185 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 75 mm – 3 HSS knives – 4,000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4.8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.0 kW S1 \/ 2.8 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 173 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the AD 260 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 260 – 400V is the entry-professional combination planer for artisans and carpenters with planing needs up to 250 mm. At 173 kg, it is significantly more manageable than the AD 310 (295 kg), making it suitable for workshops with limited space or those needing to occasionally move the machine. The 2.0 kW three-phase motor is sized for processing soft and medium woods in a professional cycle: for hard oak or ash, the reduced feed rate of 4.8 m\/min compared to the AD 310's 6 m\/min requires more conservative passes. In Krollit's customer workshops, it is predominantly used for the production of small and medium-sized solid wood furniture, where the 250 mm width covers the vast majority of processed boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe AD 260 – 400V is positioned between the ADM 260 – 230V (same width, single-phase, for workshops without three-phase power) and the AD 310 – 400V (310 mm width, larger cutter block, for those needing more capacity). The choice between AD 260 and AD 310 depends almost exclusively on the maximum width of the workpieces: if 90% of the boards do not exceed 250 mm, the AD 260 is sufficient and costs less. If you frequently work on panels between 250 and 310 mm, the AD 310 avoids having to split the pieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics and Krollit support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo AD 260 – 400V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequires 400V three-phase power: not always available in home workshops. For hobby use, consider the ADM 260 – 230V single-phase version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall carpentry \/ artisan (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm width covers most solid wood pieces. The 173 kg offers stability without a special foundation and allows repositioning in the workshop.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot indicated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 2.0 kW S1 motor is not sized for prolonged industrial cycles on hardwoods. Consider the AD 310 or ADM 300 with helical cutter block.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e processing pieces over 250 mm wide (consider AD 310); intensive production on hardwoods like oak or ash for more than 4 continuous hours; workshops with only single-phase 230V power (choose ADM 260 – 230V).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,090 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e835 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e715 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 185 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknessing table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.0 kW (2.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.8 kW (3.8 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,150 × 800 × 1,000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e173 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter guard, switch with undervoltage release, anti-restart lockout\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting jig\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between AD 260 – 400V and ADM 260 – 230V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe AD 260 – 400V requires 400V three-phase power and has a feed rate of 4.8 m\/min. The ADM 260 – 230V works with a standard domestic single-phase socket and is equipped with cast iron tables with sound-absorbing lips and an integrated motor brake. For workshops with a three-phase system, the AD 260 – 400V is preferable for its smoother motor torque; for workshops or laboratories with only a 230V socket, the ADM 260 – 230V is the only practical choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the AD 260 also work with hardwoods like oak or walnut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, with due care. For hardwoods (oak, walnut, ash), it is advisable to reduce the depth of cut to 1-1.5 mm for jointing and 1 mm for thicknessing, and ensure that the HSS knives are sharp. The 2.0 kW S1 motor is sized for intermittent work cycles on hardwoods: for intensive production on oak for more than 3-4 continuous hours, consider the AD 310 (3.0 kW) or the ADM 300.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should HSS knives be replaced?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (3-5 hours\/day), the 3 HSS knives require sharpening every 2-4 weeks for softwoods, every 1-2 weeks for hardwoods. Knives are available as original Bernardo spare parts from Krollit stock with 3-5 business day shipping. The included setting jig ensures correct positioning after each replacement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat dust collector is compatible with the AD 260?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dust extraction port is Ø 100 mm, compatible with most professional-grade woodworking dust collectors. The Bernardo DC 300 (400V, flow rate 1,200 m³\/h) is the recommended solution for continuous use. For workshops with limited space, the mobile Bernardo DC 300 integrates easily without a fixed system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed to install the AD 260?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,150 × 800 × 1,000 mm. For workpiece handling, a clear space of at least 2 m in front and behind is needed, for an operating area of approximately 5 × 1.2 m. At 173 kg, it can be moved with a manual pallet truck on a flat floor. Delivery is on a secured pallet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50623941869896,"sku":"08-1052","price":1449.41,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_AD_260_con_tavoli_in_ghisa.png?v=1760693106"},{"product_id":"bernardo-adm-300-400v","title":"Bernardo ADM 300 Planer and Thicknesser - 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo ADM 300 planer\/thicknesser offers a planing width of 305 mm, a 1,510 mm jointer table, a Ø 78 mm cutter block with 4 HSS knives at 5,500 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 220 mm, a feed rate of 6.6 m\/min, and a 3.0 kW three-phase 400V motor with a helical feed roller. Manufactured in Austria, it is distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 305 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,510 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3 – 220 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 78 mm – 4 HSS knives – 5,500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6.6 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.0 kW S1 \/ 4.2 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 280 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the ADM 300 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo ADM 300 is a professional combination planer\/thicknesser for carpentry shops with a need for extended work cycles. Two features distinguish it from the AD 310 in the same width range: the helical feed roller, which provides a more uniform and secure workpiece feed during thicknessing, and the ground cast iron tables with sound-absorbing lips, which reduce vibrations transmitted to the finished surface and the overall noise level. The 5,500 rpm cutter block (vs 4,300 on the AD 310) produces a higher number of cuts per meter of workpiece fed, with a direct effect on surface quality. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is primarily used by furniture makers and window\/door manufacturers for daily 6-8 hour shifts on solid wood.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ADM 300 occupies the professional-plus segment compared to the AD 310: same approximate width (305 vs 310 mm), but a construction more oriented towards intensive use. The ADM 300 V version adds variable feed from 1 to 10 m\/min with a digital display, useful for those who need to adjust the speed based on the type of wood and depth of cut. For those who do not need variable feed, the standard ADM 300 is sufficient and more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo ADM 300 – 400V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine designed for intensive professional use (280 kg, three-phase 400V). For hobbyists with needs up to 250 mm, consider the ADM 260 – 230V.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall carpentry \/ artisan (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe helical roller and sound-absorbing tables make a difference in prolonged daily use. The 5,500 rpm cutter block speed offers superior surface quality compared to entry-level professional planers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDesigned for intensive work cycles. The integrated trolley facilitates repositioning. For production with widths over 305 mm, consider the ADM 300 in the 410 mm version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e hobbyists with occasional use (oversized cost and dimensions); workshops without a three-phase 400V system; processing workpieces over 305 mm wide (consider AD 410 or 410 mm versions).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (Planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,510 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e915 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 78 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 pcs HSS 18%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5,500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,105 × 155 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 – 220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e585 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6.6 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed roller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHelical\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and Power Supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.2 kW (5.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and Weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,700 × 790 × 1,080 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e280 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and Safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eON\/OFF switch with undervoltage release, cutter block guard, anti-restart lockout\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard Equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 mounted HSS 18% knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated trolley for transport\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between ADM 300 and AD 310?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ADM 300 has a 5,500 rpm cutter block (vs 4,300 on the AD 310), a helical feed roller for more uniform feeding, ground cast iron tables with sound-absorbing lips, and an integrated trolley. The AD 310 has a slightly larger width (310 vs 305 mm) and weighs 295 vs 280 kg. For intensive professional use (6-8 hour shifts), the ADM 300 is the superior choice for surface quality and operational comfort; for less intensive use, the AD 310 is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the helical feed roller really make a difference?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, especially on workpieces with irregular grain or woods that tend to chip out. The helical (spiral) roller applies progressive and uniform pressure to the workpiece instead of point pressure: it reduces the risk of workpiece lift, improves the consistency of the final thickness along the entire workpiece, and minimizes roller marks on the surface of soft woods. On workpieces with knots or oblique grain, the difference in surface quality is noticeable compared to standard straight rollers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between ADM 300 and ADM 300 V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ADM 300 V adds variable feed from 1 to 10 m\/min adjustable via a digital display, compared to the fixed feed of 6.6 m\/min on the standard ADM 300. Variable feed is useful for adapting the speed to the type of wood (slower on hard woods for a better finish, faster on soft woods for roughing) and for optimizing productivity based on the depth of cut.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the knives be replaced?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn intensive professional use (6-8 hours\/day), the 4 HSS 18% knives require sharpening every 2-3 weeks on medium woods, every 1-2 weeks on hard woods. The high cutter block speed (5,500 rpm) produces more cuts per meter advanced, increasing quality but also blade wear. Knives are available as original Bernardo spare parts from Krollit stock with 3-5 business day shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed for the ADM 300 in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,700 × 790 × 1,080 mm. For moving workpieces, a clear space of at least 2.5 m in front and behind is needed. The integrated trolley allows internal movement on a level floor without additional equipment. Delivery is on a pallet: weight 280 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50623945933128,"sku":"08-1085","price":1965.48,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_ADM_300_con_tavoli_in_ghisa.jpg?v=1760691112"},{"product_id":"pialla-a-spessore-th-330-230v","title":"Bernardo TH 330 Thicknesser – 230V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo TH 330 – 230V thicknesser offers a working width of 330 mm, a passage height of 5–150 mm, a Ø 50 mm cutter block with 2 HSS knives at 9,500 rpm, a feed rate of 8 m\/min, and a 1.5 kW single-phase 230V motor. It weighs 33 kg and has dimensions of 550 × 650 × 490 mm. Manufactured in Austria, it is distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking width:\u003c\/strong\u003e 330 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePassage height (min–max):\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 150 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 50 mm – 2 HSS knives – 9,500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax depth of cut:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.8 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFeed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.5 kW S1 \/ 2.1 kW S6 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 33 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TH 330 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo TH 330 – 230V is a thicknesser only (not combined with a jointer function) in a benchtop format, designed for those who already have a separate jointer or do not need the jointer function. At 33 kg, it is the lightest and most compact in the Bernardo thicknesser range: it can be transported, stored, and repositioned without special equipment. Its 330 mm width and 9,500 rpm cutter block position it above portable hobby thicknessers (typically 200-300 mm, 6,000-8,000 rpm), while maintaining benchtop size and weight. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is primarily used as a second refining machine, alongside a jointer, or as a thicknesser in workshops with very limited space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TH 330 is a thicknesser-only machine: it does not have a planing (jointer) function. For those seeking a combined jointer+thicknesser machine in the same width range, the ADM 260 – 230V (250 mm, combined, single-phase) is the alternative. The TH 330 makes sense when you already have a separate jointer or when space and budget do not allow for a combined machine: in that case, 330 mm thicknessing width with a single-phase motor and 33 kg weight is a proposition difficult to find elsewhere in the Bernardo catalog.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo TH 330 – 230V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e33 kg, 230V single-phase, minimal footprint: easy to use and store. 330 mm width covers almost all hobby projects. Does not require a three-phase power supply.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall carpentry \/ artisan (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs a second refining machine or thicknesser in workshops with limited space. For primary use as the sole thicknesser in continuous production, the 1.5 kW motor may be limiting on hardwoods.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot indicated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 1.5 kW single-phase motor is not sized for intensive industrial cycles. Consider the standalone thicknessers in the Bernardo DH range (three-phase, 3.0 kW+ motors).\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e pieces with a height greater than 150 mm (structural limit of the machine); intensive production on hardwoods for more than 3-4 hours\/day; those who also need a planing (jointer) function (consider combined machines).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable with extension\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e640 × 330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum workpiece length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e9,500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 50 \/ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW (2.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.1 kW (2.8 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e550 × 650 × 490 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e33 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRear dust extraction port\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the TH 330 also have a planing (jointer) function?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Bernardo TH 330 is a thicknesser only: it does not have an alignment table or fence, so it cannot be used for planing (jointing). For a combined jointer+thicknesser function in 230V single-phase, the closest Bernardo solution is the ADM 260 – 230V (250 mm combined) or the ADM 260 S – 230V with a spiral cutter block.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the minimum length of workpieces?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe minimum workpiece length is 140 mm. Shorter pieces are not gripped correctly by the feed roller and can become dislodged during processing, posing a risk to the operator. For short strips, it is advisable to work them in close sequence or use a feeding support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Ø 50\/100 mm dust extraction port standard?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TH 330 has two ports: a Ø 50 mm rear port (standard for compact woodworking dust collectors) and a Ø 100 mm port (for professional dust collectors). For occasional use, a household vacuum cleaner with a Ø 50 mm hose is sufficient; for continuous professional use, a dust collector with a minimum flow rate of 400 m³\/h connected to the Ø 100 mm port is recommended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 9,500 rpm cutter block speed a real advantage?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. With the same feed rate (8 m\/min) and number of knives (2), a cutter block speed of 9,500 rpm produces approximately 45% more cuts per cm compared to a cutter block at 6,500 rpm. The practical result is a smoother surface with fewer knife marks, reducing subsequent sanding time. This is why the TH 330 produces visibly superior finishes compared to hobby-range thicknessers with slower cutter blocks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a support bench needed to use the TH 330?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TH 330 is designed to be placed on a stable workbench. With a height of only 490 mm, it cannot be used on the floor. The bench must have sufficient depth (at least 700 mm) to support the machine and allow rear access for the dust extraction port. The compact footprint (550 × 650 mm) allows it to be placed in a corner of the bench without taking up excessive space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50623949898056,"sku":"08-1012","price":362.96,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_spessore_Bernardo_TH_330_230V_compatta.jpg?v=1757349639"},{"product_id":"bernardo-pt-310s-spirale-400v","title":"Bernardo PT 310 S Jointer and Thicknesser - 400V with Spiral Cutterblock","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 310 S – 400V jointer-planer offers a planing width of 310 mm, a 1,300 mm jointer table, a spiral cutterblock Ø 75 mm with 30 TCT inserts at 4,000 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 180 mm, a feed rate of 8 m\/min, and a 2.2 kW three-phase 400V motor. Noise reduction up to 50%, and cutting edge life up to 20 times longer than HSS knives. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutterblock:\u003c\/strong\u003e spiral Ø 75 mm – 30 TCT inserts – 4,000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 180 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.2 kW S1 \/ 3.0 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNoise reduction:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 50% vs HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 180 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PT 310 S and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 310 S is the version with a TCT spiral cutterblock of the PT 310: same compact structure (180 kg), same workshop format, but with TCT technology that almost completely eliminates cutter maintenance. For those who want 310 mm width in a light format and want to add the advantage of TCT without moving to heavier machines like the AD 310 S (295 kg). The 8 m\/min feed rate, higher than the AD 310 S (6 m\/min), makes it more productive for roughing softwoods. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by carpenters who value the combination of lightness + minimal maintenance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePT 310 S vs AD 310 S: the choice between lightness and mass\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSame width (310 mm), same TCT cutterblock, but different structure. The PT 310 S weighs 180 kg and has a 1,300 mm jointer table; the AD 310 S weighs 295 kg with a 1,610 mm table. The mass of the AD 310 S provides more stability on large and heavy pieces; the PT 310 S is more manageable and takes up less space. The thicknessing height is identical (180 mm for the PT 310 S vs 225 mm for the AD 310 S); those who work pieces up to 225 mm high must choose the AD 310 S.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo PT 310 S – 400V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThree-phase 400V required. TCT is also appreciated in hobby use for minimal maintenance. For pure hobby use, consider single-phase versions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ artisan (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm with TCT in a 180 kg format: the optimal combination for workshops with limited space that want to eliminate sharpening from their routine.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor intensive cycles on large pieces, consider the AD 310 S (295 kg, more stable) or the ADM 300 with helical roller. The PT 310 S is suitable for shifts up to 6 hours.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e pieces with thicknessing height over 180 mm (consider AD 310 S with 225 mm); workshops without three-phase 400V; production of very heavy pieces requiring the structural mass of the AD 310 S.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (surface planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e990 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTCT inserts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 pcs reversible (4 cutting edges\/insert)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,110 × 130 mm – prismatic guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknessing table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW (3.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,300 × 900 × 1,180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 180 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eON\/OFF switch with undervoltage release, planer cutterblock guard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpiral cutterblock with 30 TCT inserts installed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpare TCT inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push block\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAdjustment gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between PT 310 S and PT 310 (HSS)?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PT 310 S features a spiral cutterblock with 30 TCT inserts instead of the 3 HSS knives of the standard PT 310. Structure, weight (180 kg), dimensions, and motor (2.2 kW) are identical. TCT offers: approx. 50% noise reduction, 10-20 times longer cutting edge life, maintenance by rotating the insert without disassembly. The cost of the PT 310 S is higher but is recovered in saved maintenance in 12-18 months of professional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the PT 310 S have the same thicknessing height as the AD 310 S?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The PT 310 S has a maximum thicknessing height of 180 mm; the AD 310 S reaches 225 mm. If you work pieces with a height between 180 and 225 mm, the AD 310 S is necessary. For pieces up to 180 mm, the PT 310 S is sufficient and weighs 115 kg less (180 vs 295 kg).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is maintenance of TCT inserts performed on the PT 310 S?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach TCT insert has 4 cutting edges. When the surface quality decreases, rotate the insert by 90° with a hex key (2 minutes, no cutterblock disassembly). Complete replacement only occurs when all 4 cutting edges are worn. With 30 inserts, you work on 1-3 at a time, progressively, without ever stopping production for a complete replacement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 8 m\/min feed rate too fast for hardwoods?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor hardwoods (oak, ash) with an 8 m\/min feed rate, it is advisable to reduce the depth of cut to 1-1.5 mm to avoid motor overload and fiber tear-out. For softwoods (pine, fir), the full 8 m\/min feed rate with 2-3 mm passes is feasible without problems. TCT handles speed variations better than HSS knives on woods with difficult grain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,300 × 900 × 1,180 mm. For handling pieces, a clear space of at least 2 m in front and behind is needed. At 180 kg, it can be moved with a hand pallet truck on a flat floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692584997192,"sku":"08-1039","price":1954.5,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_PT_310_S_con_albero_a_spirale_e_inserti_TCT.png?v=1760687034"},{"product_id":"bernardo-pt-410-400v","title":"Bernardo PT 410 Planer and Thicknesser – 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 410 – 400V jointer and thicknesser offers a planing width of 410 mm, a jointer table of 1,600 mm, a Ø 95 mm cutter block with 4 HSS knives at 4,000 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 220 mm, a feed rate of 8 m\/min, and a 3.0 kW three-phase 400V motor with integrated motor brake. Weight 340 kg. Made in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 410 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4 – 220 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 95 mm – 4 HSS knives – 4,000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.0 kW S1 \/ 4.2 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor brake:\u003c\/strong\u003e integrated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 340 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PT 410 – 400V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 410 – 400V is the 410 mm combination planer with HSS knives from the PT family: the same width as the AD 410 and AD 410 S, with cast iron tables and an integrated motor brake. The 8 m\/min feed rate, superior to the AD 410 (6 m\/min), makes it more productive for roughing softwoods. The integrated motor brake stops the cutter block quickly after shutdown, increasing operational safety in workshops with multiple operators. At 340 kg, it is the heaviest cast iron planer in the PT range, its mass providing stability for large and heavy workpieces. In Krollit customer workshops, it is used by window and door manufacturers and cabinet makers who process wide doors and panels in a professional cycle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePT 410 vs AD 410: same format, different approach\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSame width (410 mm), same weight (340 kg), same cast iron tables. The PT 410 has a faster feed rate (8 vs 6 m\/min), an integrated motor brake, and a slightly shorter jointer table (1,600 vs 1,685 mm). The AD 410 has 4 identical HSS knives but a longer table and a slightly different structure. For production of large workpieces, the longer table of the AD 410 is advantageous; for those who value rapid feed and the motor brake, the PT 410 is preferable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with shipping in 3-5 business days. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo PT 410 – 400V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy professional machine (340 kg, three-phase). Oversized dimensions and cost for occasional use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e410 mm with 8 m\/min feed, motor brake and cast iron tables: the combination for those working wide pieces professionally with attention to operational safety.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTo eliminate cutting edge maintenance, consider the PT 410 S with a TCT spiral cutter block. The PT 410 with HSS knives is suitable for shifts of up to 6-7 hours on medium hardwoods.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without 400V three-phase; workpieces with width less than 310 mm (oversized machine); environments with access less than 1.3 m wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (surface planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e410 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e920 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 95 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45° with prismatic guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e410 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 – 220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.2 kW (5.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor brake\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e340 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated motor brake, ON\/OFF switch with undervoltage release, cutter block guard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between PT 410 and PT 410 S?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PT 410 has 4 HSS knives on the Ø 95 mm cutter block. The PT 410 S has 72 TCT inserts on the same cutter block. Structure, dimensions and weight are identical. TCT offers reduced noise by approx. 50% and 10-20 times longer cutting edge life. The cost of the PT 410 S is higher; the savings in maintenance recuperate it in 12-18 months of professional full-shift use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow quickly does the integrated motor brake stop the cutter block?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe motor brake stops the cutter block in a few seconds after shutdown, instead of the 30-60 seconds of natural deceleration. It is an important safety feature in workshops with multiple operators or where the operator needs to move away from the machine quickly. It significantly reduces the risk of accidental contact with the rotating cutter block after shutdown.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the 4 HSS knives be replaced?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (6-8 hours\/day) on medium hardwoods, the 4 HSS knives require sharpening every 2-3 weeks. Original Bernardo spare parts are available from Krollit stock with shipping in 3-5 business days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat dust extractor is needed for the PT 410?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dust extraction port is Ø 100 mm. For a working width of 410 mm, a dust extractor with a minimum air flow of 800-1,000 m³\/h is recommended. The Bernardo DC 600 (400V) is the recommended solution for continuous professional use at this width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith a working width of 410 mm, clear space of at least 2.5-3 m in front of and behind the machine is needed. At 340 kg, delivery requires equipped platform: check access (minimum door width 1.3 m, 1.4 m height with machine on pallet truck).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692626645320,"sku":"08-1061","price":3283.13,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_PT_410_con_tavoli_in_ghisa.jpg?v=1760543631"},{"product_id":"bernardo-carotatrice-magnetica-md-4055","title":"Magnetic Drilling Machine Bernardo MD 4055 – Ø 40 mm × 50 mm, fixed speed, 1150 W motor, 12.7 kg weight","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo MD 4055 fixed-speed magnetic drilling machine offers core drilling capacities up to Ø 40 mm with a maximum depth of 50 mm, twist drill capacity up to Ø 13 mm, drill head stroke of 135 mm, no-load speed of 480 rpm, a universal 19 mm Weldon shank for standard core drills, automatic internal lubrication with integrated tank, electromagnet with an adhesive force of 10,500 N, and an 1150 W 230V single-phase motor. Weight 12.7 kg, machine dimensions 240 × 255 × 500 mm. Suitable for metalworking, machine construction, automotive sector, construction sites, and workshops. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCore drilling capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 40 mm × 50 mm depth\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax twist drill:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 13 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHead stroke:\u003c\/strong\u003e 135 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 480 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMagnet adhesive force:\u003c\/strong\u003e 10,500 N\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1150 W – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 12.7 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the MD 4055 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo MD 4055 is a portable magnetic drilling machine designed for mechanical workshops, metal fabricators, and construction sites. Fixed speed 480 rpm: simple and reliable configuration for standard use on typical materials and diameters. For workshops that primarily work with structural steel using standard core drills, the fixed speed is correctly sized, avoiding the electronic complexity and cost of an inverter. The electromagnet with 10,500 N adhesive force ensures secure fastening on steel structures even in vertical or overhead positions, with a safety belt\/chain included as standard. The automatic internal lubrication system delivers coolant directly to the tool through the spindle, significantly extending the life of core drills (expensive consumables) and improving hole quality. Its 12.7 kg weight and compact dimensions (240 × 255 × 500 mm) make it portable to construction sites in a case or plastic container, without the need for pallet jacks or cranes. Among Krollit's customers, the MD 4055 is chosen by metal fabrication workshops, automotive workshops, steel structure manufacturers, industrial maintenance technicians, and site installers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo range of magnetic drilling machines is organized by core drilling capacity (max diameter and depth) and drive type. The range includes 10 models divided into 3 families:\n\nE Family (fixed speed): MD 3550 E (Ø 35 mm), MD 3850 (Ø 38 mm), MD 4055 (Ø 40 mm), MD 5050 E (Ø 50 mm). Suitable for workshops with repetitive standard work on known materials.\n\nVD Family (Variable Digital Speed): MD 3550 VD (Ø 35 mm), MD 5050 VD (Ø 50 mm), MD 6050 VD (Ø 60 mm), MD 9875 VD (Ø 98 mm). Continuously adjustable speed for material adaptation, suitable for workshops with a variety of operations.\n\nM Family (multi-gear\/multifunction): MD 5075 with 2 gears (Ø 50 mm × 75 mm depth), TPC 1000 multifunction with tapping up to M18.\n\nThe MD 4055 is sized for workshops with standard daily use. For workshops that alternate different materials (mild steels, hardened steels, aluminum), the corresponding VD version offers greater flexibility: for the MD 4055, the equivalent VD is the superior VD range. The advantage of the E version lies in its simple construction (fewer electronic components) and lower cost.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). Weighing 12.7 kg, it is shipped in a case\/plastic container and can be easily handled by one person, even on site. Weldon 19 mm core drills, mandrels, adapters, and original Bernardo spare parts are available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the MD 4055 is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSemi-professional machine for occasional use on steel structures. Works on 230V single-phase domestic power, 12.7 kg weight manageable by one person.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetal fabricator with daily use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 40 mm capacity and fixed speed 480 rpm sized for standard structural steels. Reliability of a simple configuration without complex electronic components.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSite installer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12.7 kg weight and compact dimensions (240 × 255 × 500 mm) make it transportable. 10,500 N magnet force for secure fastening on vertical structures.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e core drilling beyond Ø 40 mm (upgrade to MD 5050, MD 5075, MD 6050 VD or MD 9875 VD models); deep core drilling beyond 50 mm (the MD 5075 with 75 mm depth or MD 9875 VD with 75 mm depth are correctly sized); workshops with a variety of materials requiring different speeds (the corresponding VD version offers greater flexibility); non-magnetic structures (aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel): the electromagnet does not adhere; continuous industrial use at high frequency (magnetic drills are designed for intermittent use).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax core drilling diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax core drilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax twist drill diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 13 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrill head stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e135 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeed and tool holder\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e480 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeldon shank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e19 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance Weldon - base\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMagnetic base\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMagnetic adhesive force\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10,500 N\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMagnetic base dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e159 × 79 × 48 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1150 W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e240 × 255 × 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 12.7 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo MD 4055 magnetic drilling machine\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlastic transport case\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCoolant tank\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety belt\/chain for vertical and overhead use\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser manual in Italian\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eService tool set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eWhat materials does the MD 4055's electromagnet work on?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly on magnetic ferrous materials: structural steel, iron, carbon steels. It does not work on aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, non-ferrous materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe electromagnet creates the magnetic field that attaches the machine to the structure: without ferrous material, attachment is impossible. For working on aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel, fixed drill presses or dedicated mechanical fastening systems are required. For most standard metal structures (fabrication, frames, profiles), the electromagnet is the fastest and most reliable fastening system.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eCan I use the drilling machine in a vertical or overhead position?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. with the included safety belt\/chain. The 10,500 N magnetic force is sized for fastening in any position, but safety always requires the additional mechanical restraint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe electromagnet retains the machine even during a momentary power interruption for the seconds needed to prevent falls, but in the event of a prolonged interruption (torn cable, blackout), the safety belt\/chain is the only reliable system. Standard safety procedures ALWAYS require mechanical restraint in addition to the electric magnet, regardless of the nominal adhesive force.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eHow does the automatic internal lubrication system work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe coolant (oil-water emulsion or dedicated metalworking oil) starts from an integrated tank and is delivered directly to the center of the tool through an internal channel. It works in any position (even overhead) by gravity or pressure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInternal lubrication significantly extends the life of core drills (expensive consumables) by reducing friction and dissipating heat. Without lubrication, drills last 30-50 holes; with internal lubrication, 100-200 holes. The coolant is not included and is available from standard industrial suppliers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the 19 mm Weldon shank a universal standard?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The 19 mm Weldon shank is the international standard for core drills: most commercial drills (Karnasch, Magbohrer, Rotabroach, BDS, etc.) use this shank. All drills have a 19 mm Weldon pin for quick fastening via a lateral set screw.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor workshops with drills of other brands or standards, adapters can be used. For future investments, the 19 mm Weldon shank is the most common choice with the widest market offering. Original Bernardo drills come with a 19 mm Weldon shank and are available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eHow much power does the motor consume during intermittent use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1150 W motor typically consumes 1.1-1.3 kWh per effective hour of work. In intermittent artisanal use (1-2 minutes per hole, pauses between holes), the average consumption is 0.3-0.5 kWh\/hour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe motor only runs during hole cutting: it is off between holes. For workshops with significant electricity costs, consumption is negligible. The drilling machine is an electrically efficient machine: nominal power is only engaged during actual processing minutes. For intensive continuous use, a standard industrial meter is recommended.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693442797896,"sku":"01-1370","price":581.96,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carotatrice_magnetica_Bernardo_MD_4055_compatta_e_trasportabile.jpg?v=1758117736"},{"product_id":"bernardo-carotatrici-md-5075","title":"Magnetic Core Drilling Machine Bernardo MD 5075 – Ø 50 mm × 75 mm, 2-speed, extended core drilling depth 75 mm, 1550 W motor, 18 kg weight","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo MD 5075 multifunction magnetic drilling machine offers core drilling capacities up to Ø 50 mm with a maximum depth of 75 mm, twist drill capacity up to Ø 16 mm, drill head travel of 195 mm, speeds of 230 \/ 550 rpm (2 gears), MT 2 spindle taper with 19 mm Weldon adapter for versatile tools (twist drills, reamers, countersinks), automatic internal lubrication with integrated tank, electromagnet with 12,800 N adhesion force, 1550 W, 230V single-phase motor. Weight 18 kg, machine dimensions 270 × 300 × 625 mm. Suitable for metal fabrication, machine building, automotive industry, construction site and workshop work. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCore drilling capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 50 mm × 75 mm depth\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax twist drill:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 16 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHead travel:\u003c\/strong\u003e 195 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 230 \/ 550 rpm (2 gears)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMagnet adhesion force:\u003c\/strong\u003e 12,800 N\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1550 W – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 18 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the MD 5075 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo MD 5075 is a portable magnetic core drilling machine sized for mechanical workshops, metal fabrication, and construction sites. Machine with 2-speed transmission (230 \/ 550 rpm): the low gear provides high torque for large diameter core drilling, the high gear for faster drilling. The electromagnet with 12,800 N adhesion force ensures secure fastening on steel structures even in vertical or overhead positions, with a safety belt\/chain included as standard. The automatic internal lubrication system brings coolant directly to the tool through the spindle, significantly extending the life of core drills (expensive consumables) and improving hole quality. Its 18 kg weight and compact dimensions (270 × 300 × 625 mm) make it transportable to construction sites in a case or plastic container, without the need for pallet jacks or cranes. In Krollit customer workshops, the MD 5075 is chosen by metal fabricators, automotive workshops, steel structure manufacturers, industrial maintenance technicians, and on-site installers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo magnetic core drilling machine range is organized by core drilling capacity (max diameter and depth) and drive type. The range includes 10 models divided into 3 families:\n\nE family (fixed speed): MD 3550 E (Ø 35 mm), MD 3850 (Ø 38 mm), MD 4055 (Ø 40 mm), MD 5050 E (Ø 50 mm). Suitable for workshops with repetitive standard operations on known materials.\n\nVD family (Digital Variable Speed): MD 3550 VD (Ø 35 mm), MD 5050 VD (Ø 50 mm), MD 6050 VD (Ø 60 mm), MD 9875 VD (Ø 98 mm). Continuously adjustable speed for material adaptation, suitable for workshops with a variety of operations.\n\nM family (multi-gear\/multifunction): MD 5075 with 2 gears (Ø 50 mm × 75 mm depth), TPC 1000 multifunction with tapping up to M18.\n\nMD 5075: key feature is the 75 mm core drilling depth (vs 50 mm of other MD 5050 models). 2-speed transmission 230\/550 rpm: low gear for maximum torque on large diameters, high gear for higher production rate on drilling. MT 2 taper with Weldon adapter, sized for metal fabrication with thick structures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). With a weight of 18 kg, it is shipped in a case\/plastic container and easily handled by one person, even on construction sites. 19 mm Weldon core drills, mandrels, adapters, and original Bernardo spare accessories available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the MD 5075 is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional machine: for standard hobby use it may be oversized. Consider simpler E models.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy fabrication \/ thick structures\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 mm core drilling depth (vs 50 mm of other models) for thick structures. 2 gears (230\/550 rpm) to optimize torque on large diameters.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial structure installer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor base plates, structural profiles, work requiring depth greater than standard 50 mm. MT 2 taper with Weldon adapter for professional tools.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e non-magnetic structures (aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel): the electromagnet does not adhere; continuous industrial high-cadence use (magnetic core drills are sized for intermittent use).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax core drilling diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax core drilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax twist drill diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 16 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrill head travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e195 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeed and tool holder\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 \/ 550 rpm (2 gears)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeldon adapter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e19 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeldon - base distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle - base distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMagnetic base\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMagnetic adhesion force\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12,800 N\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMagnetic base dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e178 × 94 × 44 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1550 W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e270 × 300 × 625 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 18 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo MD 5075 magnetic drilling machine\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlastic carrying case\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCoolant tank\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMT 2 \/ Weldon 19 mm adapter with internal cooling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety belt\/chain for vertical and overhead use\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser manual in Italian\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSet of service tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eWhat materials does the MD 5075's electromagnet work on?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly on magnetic ferrous materials: structural steel, iron, carbon steels. It does not work on aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, non-ferrous materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe electromagnet creates the magnetic field that fixes the machine to the structure: without ferrous material, attachment is impossible. For working on aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel, fixed drill presses or dedicated mechanical clamping systems are needed. For most standard metal structures (fabrication, frames, profiles), the electromagnet is the fastest and most reliable clamping system.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eCan I use the core drill in a vertical or overhead position?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. with the included safety belt\/chain. The 12,800 N magnetic force is dimensioned for clamping in any position, but safety always requires the additional mechanical restraint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe electromagnet holds the machine even in a momentary power outage for the seconds needed to prevent falls, but in the event of a prolonged outage (torn cable, blackout), the safety belt\/chain is the only reliable system. Standard safety procedures ALWAYS require mechanical restraint in addition to the electric magnet, regardless of the nominal adhesion force.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eHow does the automatic internal lubrication system work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe coolant (oil-water emulsion or dedicated metalworking oil) starts from an integrated tank and is carried directly to the center of the tool through an internal channel. It works in any position (even overhead) via gravity or pressure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInternal lubrication significantly extends the life of core drills (expensive consumables) by reducing friction and dissipating heat. Without lubrication, drills last 30-50 holes; with internal lubrication, 100-200 holes. The coolant fluid is not included and is available from standard industrial suppliers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the 19 mm Weldon adapter a universal standard?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The 19 mm Weldon is the international standard for core drills: most commercial drills (Karnasch, Magbohrer, Rotabroach, BDS, etc.) use this adapter. The drills all have a 19 mm Weldon shank for quick fastening via a lateral grub screw.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor workshops with drills of other brands or standards, adapters can be used. For future investments, the 19 mm Weldon is the most widespread choice with the largest market offering. Original Bernardo drills come with a 19 mm Weldon adapter and are available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eHow much power does the motor consume during intermittent use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1550 W motor typically draws 1.6-1.8 kWh per actual hour of work. In intermittent artisan use (1-2 minutes per hole, pauses between holes), the average consumption is 0.3-0.5 kWh\/hour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe motor only operates during hole cutting: it is off between holes. For workshops with significant electricity costs, consumption is negligible. The core drill is an electrically efficient machine: the nominal power is only engaged during the actual working minutes. For intensive continuous use, a standard industrial meter is recommended.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693462524232,"sku":"01-1372","price":779.6,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_Carotatrice_magnetica_MD_5075_compatta_e_potente.jpg?v=1758039321"},{"product_id":"sega-da-banco-tk-200-rn-230v","title":"Bernardo Bench Saw TK 200 RN - 230V","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo TK 200 RN Table Saw – 230 V\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo TK 200 RN table saw is a woodworking saw for hobbyist-professional use, with a 200 mm HM blade, 4,750 rpm rotation speed, and a cutting capacity of up to 55 mm at 90°. Equipped with a sliding table with a 720 mm stroke and a cutting width of up to 730 mm, it has been distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003eBlade diameter: 200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eBlade speed: 4,750 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eMax cutting height 90°: 55 mm\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eMax cutting height 45°: 42 mm\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eParallel cutting width: 730 mm\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eMotor: 1.1 kW (S1) – 1.5 kW (S6)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eVoltage: 230 V\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eDust extraction port: 100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eSliding table stroke: 720 mm\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eWeight: 72 kg\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TK 200 RN and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e \u003cp\u003eThe TK 200 RN is used by carpenters, installers, and artisan workshops for cutting solid wood, panels, and derivative materials. It is suitable for general carpentry work, furniture making, longitudinal and transverse cuts on medium-sized pieces. The sliding table allows for working on longer pieces with greater control.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e \u003cp\u003eShipping 5-9 working days (7 days for southern regions). For machines over 200 kg, ground floor delivery with hydraulic tailgate included. Technical assistance in Italian available for the entire life of the product. Original Bernardo spare parts available from Krollit warehouse, Monteforte Irpino (AV).\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ch3\u003eWho is the TK 200 RN for\u003c\/h3\u003e \u003ctable\u003e \u003cthead\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/thead\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdvanced hobbyists\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e55 mm cutting height and extended table for advanced home projects.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisans and carpenters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e730 mm cutting width and sliding table for working on panels and boards.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.1 kW motor designed for intermittent use, not for intensive cycles.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e large-scale industrial production or continuous processing of high-strength materials.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e \u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting height 90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e55 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting height 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e42 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eParallel cutting width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e730 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e \u003ch3\u003eTable and dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e \u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e530 × 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable extension\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e530 × 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSliding table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 × 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSliding table stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e720 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e890 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e \u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e \u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInput power (S1)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.1 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput power (S6)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e \u003ch3\u003eStructure and components\u003c\/h3\u003e \u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,750 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1520 × 1000 × 1050 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e72 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e \u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e \u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003eHM blade Ø 200 × 2.2 × 30 mm – Z32\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eBlade guard with dust extraction\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eDouble-sided miter fence\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eTable extension\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eAluminum rip fence with stop\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eSliding table\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eBase frame\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eControl unit\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eUser manual\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cdetails\u003e \u003csummary\u003eWhat is the cutting capacity of the TK 200 RN?\u003c\/summary\u003e \u003cp\u003eThe machine allows a cutting height of up to 55 mm at 90° and 42 mm at 45°.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp\u003eThis capacity makes it suitable for working on medium-thickness boards, panels, and solid wood. For deeper cuts, models with a larger blade diameter should be considered.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/details\u003e \u003cdetails\u003e \u003csummary\u003eIs the cutting width sufficient for large panels?\u003c\/summary\u003e \u003cp\u003eYes, the cutting width reaches up to 730 mm with the rip fence.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp\u003eThis value allows for working on large panels. The sliding table with a 720 mm stroke helps maintain stability when cutting long pieces.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/details\u003e \u003cdetails\u003e \u003csummary\u003eCan a dust extractor be connected?\u003c\/summary\u003e \u003cp\u003eYes, the machine has a 100 mm dust extraction port.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp\u003eConnecting a dust extraction system reduces the dispersion of chips and dust, improving visibility during cutting and keeping the work area clean.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/details\u003e \u003cdetails\u003e \u003csummary\u003eIs it suitable for continuous professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e \u003cp\u003eIt is suitable for artisan use, but not for continuous industrial cycles.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp\u003eThe 1.1 kW (S1) motor is designed for intermittent use. For intensive production, saws with more powerful motors and industrial construction should be considered.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/details\u003e \u003cdetails\u003e \u003csummary\u003eWhat maintenance does the table saw require?\u003c\/summary\u003e \u003cp\u003eIt requires regular cleaning and blade inspection.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp\u003eIt is advisable to remove chips from the table and check the alignment of the blade and guides. Periodic maintenance maintains precision and safety during use.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50695660273992,"sku":"09-1041","price":642.22,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_Sega_da_banco_TK_200_RN_230V.jpg?v=1777725078"},{"product_id":"sega-da-banco-tk-200-rsn-230v","title":"Bernardo TK 200 RSN Table Saw – Compact, precise, and stable with enclosed base","description":"\u003cp\u003eBernardo TK 200 RSN Table Saw\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo TK 200 RSN table saw is a woodworking saw for hobbyist to professional use, with a 200 mm blade, a 1.1 kW motor, and a rotational speed of 4,750 rpm. Equipped with a closed base, cast iron table, and a roller carriage with a 720 mm stroke, it allows cuts up to 55 mm at 90°. Manufactured by the Austrian brand Bernardo, it has been distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade diameter: 200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade speed: 4,750 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax cutting height at 90°: 55 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax cutting height at 45°: 42 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eParallel cutting width: 730 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: 1.1 kW (S1) – 1.5 kW (S6)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVoltage: 230 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDust extraction port: 100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCarriage stroke: 720 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 84 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TK 200 RSN and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TK 200 RSN is used by carpenters, installers, and artisans for working with solid wood, panels, and derived materials. It is suitable for longitudinal, transverse, and miter cuts in the workshop or studio, with a compact structure that allows installation even in small spaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShipping 5-9 business days (7 days for southern regions). For machines over 200 kg, ground floor delivery with hydraulic tailgate included. Technical assistance in Italian available for the entire life of the product. Original Bernardo spare parts available from Krollit warehouse, Monteforte Irpino (AV).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the TK 200 RSN is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdvanced hobbyists\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting up to 55 mm and compact structure for domestic work.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisans and carpenters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e720 mm carriage and 730 mm width for panel processing.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot indicated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.1 kW motor designed for intermittent use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot indicated for:\u003c\/strong\u003e continuous industrial processing or intensive cutting of high-density materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting height 90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e55 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting height 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e42 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eParallel cutting width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e730 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and structure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e530 × 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable extension\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e530 × 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller carriage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 × 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarriage stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e720 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e900 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInput power (S1)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.1 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput power (S6)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStructure and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,750 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1520 × 1010 × 1050 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e84 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo TK 200 RSN Table Saw 230 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade Ø 200 × 2.2 × 30 mm – 32 teeth\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade guard with dust extraction\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDouble miter gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAluminum parallel fence with stop\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable extension\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated roller carriage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eClosed steel base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor brake\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAssembly tool set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the cutting capacity of the TK 200 RSN?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine allows a cutting height of up to 55 mm at 90° and 42 mm at 45°.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese values allow for working with solid wood and medium-thickness panels. For miter cuts, the capacity is reduced, but still maintains precision in angular work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the closed base improve performance?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the closed base increases the rigidity of the structure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt reduces vibrations during cutting, improving the quality of the result and operational comfort. This is especially useful for precision work on panels and long boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs it possible to connect a dust extractor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the machine has a 100 mm dust extraction port.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eConnecting a dust extractor reduces the presence of chips and dust. This improves visibility of the cutting line and keeps the work area clean.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs it suitable for continuous professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is suitable for artisan use, not for continuous production.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1.1 kW motor is designed for intermittent use. For intensive cycles, models with more powerful motors and industrial structure should be considered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat maintenance does the table saw require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt requires regular cleaning and blade inspection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is advisable to remove debris from the table and check the alignment of the blade and guides. This maintains precision and safety over time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50695663845704,"sku":"09-1043","price":677.97,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Sega_da_banco_Bernardo_TK_200_RSN_con_basamento_chiuso.jpg?v=1777726369"},{"product_id":"sega-per-traforo-ss-405-vario-230-v","title":"Scroll Saw SS 405 Vario \/ 230 V","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eScroll Saw SS 405 Vario \/ 230 V – Precision and versatility for model making and detailed work\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SS 405 Vario is a compact and powerful scroll saw, ideal for curved cuts on wood, plastic, non-ferrous metals, polystyrene, and more. Thanks to its continuous speed adjustment, tilting table, and flexible shaft with included grinding wheels, it's perfect for model makers, artisans, and precision enthusiasts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey features:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIdeal for internal, external, and tight radius cuts on various materials\u003cbr\u003eFlexible shaft included with grinding pins to expand applications\u003cbr\u003eCompatible with scroll saw blades with and without pins\u003cbr\u003eContinuous speed adjustment: from 550 to 1600 strokes\/min\u003cbr\u003eQuick-release system for easy and fast blade changes\u003cbr\u003eRobust cast iron construction for stable, vibration-free work\u003cbr\u003eTilting table from 0° to +45° for bevel cuts\u003cbr\u003eLED light to illuminate the work area\u003cbr\u003eIntegrated blowing device for optimal visibility of the cutting line\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e \u003ctable class=\"w-fit min-w-(--thread-content-width)\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFeature\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDetails\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThroat\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e405 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWorking height\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e52 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBlade length\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStroke speed (adjustable)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e550 – 1600 \/ min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 x 410 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTable tilt\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDust extraction outlet\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 35 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMotor power\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90 W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSupply voltage\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e330 x 630 x 380 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 10 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e \u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003e2 saw blades\u003cbr\u003eBlade guard\u003cbr\u003eLED work light\u003cbr\u003eWorkpiece holder\u003cbr\u003eBlowing device\u003cbr\u003eFlexible shaft with grinding\/polishing pins and cut-off wheel\u003cbr\u003eTools\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 working days (7 days in the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 working day shipping. Customer service available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes this machine include a standard blade?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlease check the standard equipment with Krollit. Original Bernardo replacement blades are available with 3–5 working day shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade should I use for wood vs. metal?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor wood: fine-toothed blades (10–20 TPI) for clean cuts. For metal: bi-metal blades with high tooth density (18–32 TPI) to reduce vibrations. For plastic: blades with specific geometry. Contact Krollit for correct blade selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre assistance and spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 working day shipping. Customer service available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDo I need a dust extractor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, highly recommended for professional use. Please check the dust extraction outlet diameter with Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50695696777544,"sku":"14-2254","price":192.16,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Sega_per_traforo_SS_405_Vario_Bernardo_per_modellismo_e_tagli_curvi_di_precisione.jpg?v=1755767560"},{"product_id":"troncatrice-radiale-zkg-305-s-230-v","title":"ZKG 305 S radial miter saw - 230 V","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRadial miter saw ZKG 305 S \/ 230 V\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eZKG 305 S\u003c\/strong\u003e is the ideal miter saw for cross, miter, and bevel cuts on wood, plastic, and non-ferrous metals. Thanks to its impressive cutting capacity of 305 mm, dual column guide, and integrated laser device, it offers a perfect combination of precision and versatility, all in a compact and easily transportable body.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMain features:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIdeal for cutting wood, plastic, and non-ferrous metals\u003cbr\u003eDual column guide for smooth and precise movements\u003cbr\u003ePowerful 1.8 kW motor for clean, continuous cuts\u003cbr\u003eCarbide-tipped blade with 60 teeth for burr-free results\u003cbr\u003eTable extension on both sides to support long workpieces\u003cbr\u003eIntegrated depth stop for grooving cuts\u003cbr\u003eBlade automatically covered when head is raised\u003cbr\u003ePreset miter angles: 0°, 15°, 22.5°, 30°, 45°\u003cbr\u003eEasy-to-read scales for cutting angles and depth\u003cbr\u003eLow weight (20 kg) for easy transport\u003cbr\u003eLinear laser device for high precision\u003cbr\u003eQuick blade change via integrated lock\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade diameter x bore\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 x 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo-load speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4800 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting capacity 90° \/ 90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 x 105 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMiter cut 45° (right\/left)*\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e210 x 105 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBevel cut 45° left**\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 x 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompound miter 45° left\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e210 x 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.8 kW (2.4 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e910 x 1080 x 670 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eStandard accessories\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003eCarbide-tipped saw blade 305 x 2.8 x 30 mm \/ 60 teeth\u003cbr\u003eSide table extensions\u003cbr\u003eLinear laser device\u003cbr\u003eDust bag\u003cbr\u003eVertical clamp (downholder)\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes this machine include a standard blade?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlease check the standard accessories with Krollit. Original Bernardo replacement blades are available with 3–5 business days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade should be used for wood vs. metal?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor wood: fine-tooth blades (10–20 TPI) for clean cuts. For metal: bi-metal blades with high tooth density (18–32 TPI) to reduce vibrations. For plastic: blades with specific geometry. Contact Krollit for correct blade selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre assistance and spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts are available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support is available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a dust extractor needed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, highly recommended for professional use. Please check the dust extraction outlet diameter with Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50695707132232,"sku":"09-10020","price":272.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Troncatrice_ZKG_305_S_con_guida_radiale_e_laser_per_tagli_di_precisione.jpg?v=1752138881"},{"product_id":"seghe-a-nastro-bernardo-ebs-115-400v","title":"Bernardo EBS 115 \/ 400 V Metal Cutting Band Saw","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo Metal Bandsaw EBS 115 \/ 400 V\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eBernardo EBS 115 \/ 400 V\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact and affordable bandsaw, ideal for hobbyists and small workshops that need precision and practicality in metal cutting. Thanks to the adjustable vise for miter cuts from 90° to 45°, it offers versatility in processing. The cutting pressure can be adapted to each workpiece, while the belt system allows you to choose between 3 speeds (20\/29\/50 m\/min), optimizing performance based on the material. The robust cast iron frame ensures stability and vibration-free operation. Also usable vertically for cutting sheets, it comes complete with material fence, mobile base, and handle for easy transport. With a cutting capacity of up to \u003cstrong\u003e100 x 150 mm at 90°\u003c\/strong\u003e, a 0.37 kW motor, and a contained weight (62 kg), it represents an excellent compromise between performance, portability, and price, ideal for advanced DIY enthusiasts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey features:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eCutting capacity up to 100 x 150 mm at 90°\u003cbr\u003eAdjustable vise for miter cuts 90° – 45°\u003cbr\u003eAlso usable vertically for sheets\u003cbr\u003eCast iron frame for stable and vibration-free cuts\u003cbr\u003e3 selectable cutting speeds (20\/29\/50 m\/min)\u003cbr\u003eAdjustable cutting pressure on the workpiece\u003cbr\u003eAutomatic shut-off at the end of the cut\u003cbr\u003eMobile base and handle for easy transport\u003cbr\u003eOptimal price-performance ratio for hobbyists and craftsmen\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEBS 115 \/ 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRound cutting capacity 90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat cutting capacity 90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 x 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRound cutting capacity 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e76 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat cutting capacity 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e76 x 115 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade (L x W x Th.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1638 x 13 x 0.65 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 \/ 29 \/ 50 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power (S1)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.37 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power (S6)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.55 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e895 x 400 x 950 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e62 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBernardo Bandsaw EBS 115 \/ 400 V\u003cbr\u003eMounted bandsaw blade\u003cbr\u003eAdjustable quick-release vise\u003cbr\u003eMaterial fence\u003cbr\u003eSupport table\u003cbr\u003eMobile base with wheels\u003cbr\u003eAutomatic shut-off at the end of the cut\u003cbr\u003eSeparate emergency button compliant with CE standards\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between horizontal and vertical saws?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe horizontal saw lowers the band assembly onto the stationary workpiece—ideal for repeatedly cutting bars and profiles to size. The vertical saw (bench saw type) has the band running vertically, and the workpiece is guided manually: suitable for shaped cuts and curves.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat speed should be used for stainless steel with the Bernardo Metal Bandsaw?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor AISI 304 stainless steel, use the lowest available speed (20–30 m\/min) with active coolant if available. Higher speeds cause overheating and rapid blade wear. For stainless steel over 50 mm in diameter, also reduce the downward force of the band assembly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre replacement blades available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Original Bernardo bimetal blades for the Bernardo Metal Bandsaw are available with 3–5 business days shipping. Available in various tooth configurations for different materials: steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, cast iron.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the saw include a cooling system?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDepends on the version. Some Bernardo versions include an integrated coolant pump (typically indicated in the name or technical table). For versions without cooling, manual cutting oil is recommended for stainless steel and hard materials. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAssistance and spare parts available in Italian?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50695710376264,"sku":"04-1090","price":400.78,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_Sega_a_nastro_per_metallo_EBS_115_400_V.jpg?v=1758883911"},{"product_id":"bernardo-shrinker-stretcher-ss-210-f","title":"Bernardo Shrinker and Stretcher Foot Operated SS 210 F","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo Foot-Operated Shrinker and Stretcher SS 210 F\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eBernardo Foot-Operated Shrinker and Stretcher SS 210 F\u003c\/strong\u003e is a professional machine for shrinking and stretching sheet metal, ideal for autobody work, car restoration, and artisanal metal panel fabrication. With a capacity of up to \u003cstrong\u003e1.2 mm on steel\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e1.5 mm on aluminum\u003c\/strong\u003e, it offers reliable and precise performance. The \u003cstrong\u003e200 mm throat depth\u003c\/strong\u003e allows for processing medium to large-sized pieces, expanding the range of applications compared to compact models. The foot operation leaves hands free, increasing comfort, safety, and operational precision. Supplied with two separate attachments (one for shrinking and one for stretching), it eliminates the need to change tools during work. Weighing 37 kg and with stable dimensions (300 x 920 x 1225 mm), it is a robust and functional solution for professional workshops and laboratories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey features:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eCapacity: up to 1.2 mm steel and up to 1.5 mm aluminum\u003cbr\u003e200 mm throat depth for working on larger pieces\u003cbr\u003eFoot pedal system for hands-free operation\u003cbr\u003eTwo separate attachments: shrinking and stretching\u003cbr\u003eNo tool change required during work\u003cbr\u003eStable structure and 37 kg weight\u003cbr\u003eIdeal for autobody work, restoration, and artisanal workshops\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable class=\"w-fit min-w-(--thread-content-width)\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSS 210 F\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel capacity (400 N\/mm²)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminum capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThroat depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 x 920 x 1225 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 37 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003e1 Shrinker attachment (compression)\u003cbr\u003e1 Stretcher attachment (expansion)\u003cbr\u003eFoot pedal\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days in the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business day shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat does a shrinker do and what does a stretcher do?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA \u003cstrong\u003eshrinker\u003c\/strong\u003e compresses the metal fiber at the edge, shortening it and creating a concave curve. A \u003cstrong\u003estretcher\u003c\/strong\u003e elongates the fiber by expanding it, creating a convex curve. Alternating between the two functions allows for complex shapes to be formed on thin sheet metal without wrinkles or tears. An essential tool for autobody workers, boat builders, and vehicle restorers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat sheet metal thicknesses can the Bernardo Foot-Operated Shrinker and Stretcher work with?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shrinkers\/stretchers typically work with steel up to 1.2–2.0 mm and aluminum up to 1.5–2.5 mm depending on the model. Check the specific limits in the technical table for the Bernardo Foot-Operated Shrinker and Stretcher. Exceeding the limits will cause damage to the tools and irregular deformation of the workpiece.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between lever, foot-operated, and motorized versions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003elever\u003c\/strong\u003e version (Pro) is manual: the operator operates the lever with both hands, ideal for occasional work. The \u003cstrong\u003efoot-operated\u003c\/strong\u003e version (FD\/F) operates the machine with the foot, freeing both hands to hold and guide the workpiece — more comfortable for repetitive work. The \u003cstrong\u003emotorized\u003c\/strong\u003e or electric version automates the complete cycle for series production.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDo the jaws wear out? Are spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Shrinker\/stretcher jaws wear out after prolonged intensive use. Original Bernardo replacement jaws are available with 3–5 business day shipping. Replacement does not require special tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it also work on copper and brass?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Copper and brass are more ductile materials than steel: the effective capacity is higher than for mild steel. For specific alloys, verify thickness limits with Krollit. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50695859077448,"sku":"06-1107","price":724.7,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Shrinker_e_Stretcher_a_pedale_Bernardo_SS_210_F_gola_200_mm.jpg?v=1758277919"},{"product_id":"spaccalegna-hs-16-ze","title":"Bernardo HS 16 ZE vertical log splitter - 16 ton splitting force, dual power: 4.5 kW 400V three-phase electric + PTO shaft, weight 277 kg","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo HS 16 ZE vertical log splitter is designed for splitting logs in agricultural, forestry, and professional settings, handling medium to large logs. It offers a splitting force of 16 tons, a maximum piston stroke of 948 mm, and can process logs up to 1,100 mm in length. It features dual power options: a 4.5 kW 400V three-phase electric motor or a PTO (power take-off) shaft for tractor use. It has an 18-liter hydraulic tank. Safety features include two-hand operation compliant with European regulations and an integrated log lifter for loading heavy blocks. The robust 277 kg structure includes a wheeled trolley for transport, with overall dimensions of 1,400 × 1,500 × 2,500 mm. Distributed in Italy by Krollit as the official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSplitting force:\u003c\/strong\u003e 16 tons\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax piston stroke:\u003c\/strong\u003e 948 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkable log length:\u003c\/strong\u003e up to 1,100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDrive:\u003c\/strong\u003e Dual: electric 4.5 kW \/ 400V three-phase + PTO (power take-off) shaft\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHydraulic tank:\u003c\/strong\u003e 18 liters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSafety:\u003c\/strong\u003e Two-hand operation\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLog lifter:\u003c\/strong\u003e Integrated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 277 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the HS 16 ZE and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo HS 16 ZE is a vertical log splitter sized for farms, small forestry businesses, firewood suppliers, and district heating plant operators. The 16-ton force handles hardwood blocks up to Ø 350-400 mm, even with knots and branches. The dual power supply (electric 4.5 kW 400V three-phase + PTO shaft) is a distinctive feature: in a workshop\/shed, the electric motor is used for consistent work; in the field (e.g., in forests, remote locations without electricity), the PTO shaft connected to the tractor's power take-off is used. This is a crucial feature for those who alternate between workshop work and field collection. The integrated log lifter is a critical design feature for heavy blocks: it lifts blocks to the hydraulic piston without the operator having to manually lift logs that can weigh 50-100 kg. Two-hand safety operation requires both of the operator's hands to activate the piston, eliminating the risk of crushing hands during splitting. Among Krollit's customers, the HS 16 ZE log splitter is chosen by farms with their own woodlands, local firewood suppliers, large-scale wood-heated agritourism businesses, and forestry cooperatives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo HS log splitter range is organized into 7 models by splitting force and drive, grouped into 3 sub-families: E family (electric only): HS 11 E (11 t, single-phase 230V), HS 14 E (14 t, three-phase 400V), HS 16 E (16 t, three-phase 400V); ZE family (dual: electric + PTO shaft): HS 16 ZE (16 t), HS 22 ZE (22 t), HS 30 ZE (30 t); Z family (PTO shaft only): HS 30 Z (30 t).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe HS 16 ZE model is the dual-drive version (electric + PTO shaft) of its respective nominal force. Difference from HS 16 E (electric only): the ZE version costs more but offers flexibility of use even in the field with a tractor. For exclusive workshop\/shed applications with a stable electrical connection, the E version is more economical. The ZE family includes 3 forces: 16 t (HS 16 ZE), 22 t (HS 22 ZE), 30 t (HS 30 ZE). Increase force for larger logs and harder wood: HS 22 ZE suitable for oak\/beech Ø 350-400 mm, HS 30 ZE for industrial logs Ø 500 mm. For exclusive field applications without electrical power, the corresponding Z version (HS 30 Z) is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). The HS 16 ZE log splitter, weighing 277 kg, is shipped on a protective pallet. A pallet truck or crane is recommended for unloading: the machine is substantial and requires technical personnel for positioning. Dimensions 1,400 × 1,500 × 2,500 mm: check the available height of the storage room (the machine has a retractable cylinder to reduce height during storage). Hydraulic oil, wedge spare parts (splitting wedges, wedge guide), hydraulic pumps, valves, and original Bernardo log lifter spare parts are available from stock with 3-5 working day shipping. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the HS 16 ZE is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWoodworking hobbyist with high family consumption\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 t force is oversized for strictly hobby use. For simple domestic use, consider HS 11 E or HS 14 E.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFarm\/forestry business with continuous use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 t force for hardwood logs up to Ø 350-400 mm. Dual electric\/PTO drive for workshop and field use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFirewood supplier\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated log lifter for heavy loads, two-hand safety for intensive use, 18 l hydraulic tank for autonomy.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e applications with exclusive workshop use with electrical connection (the equivalent E version is more economical); applications with exclusive field use with a tractor (the corresponding Z version is more economical); use in enclosed spaces without ventilation (adequate ventilation is recommended for prolonged use, although the electric machine does not generate fumes); use by personnel not trained in safety (the log splitter is a dangerous machine: two-hand safety is mandatory).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSplitting capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum splitting force\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 tons\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkable log length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eup to 1,100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax piston stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e948 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed speed (work)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHydraulic system\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydraulic tank capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydraulic pumps\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh quality for continuous use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDual drive\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMode 1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElectric motor 4.5 kW \/ 400V three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMode 2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePTO (power take-off) shaft for tractor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSafety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eControl system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo-hand operation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLog lifter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWedge guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMassive and precise\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,400 × 1,500 × 2,500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 277 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo HS 16 ZE vertical log splitter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated log lifter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheeled trolley for transport\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo-hand safety system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMassive and precise wedge guide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser and safety manual in Italian\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOfficial Bernardo warranty\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eHow long does a typical split take?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor medium-sized logs (Ø 200-300 mm), a complete split typically takes 8-15 seconds: 3-5 seconds for the piston to advance (at the nominal adjustable speed), 2-5 seconds for cutting the wood, and 3-5 seconds for retraction. For larger logs or hardwood, the time will extend.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor series production (e.g., preparing firewood for the winter season), the typical cadence is 200-400 logs\/hour with an experienced operator. The integrated log lifter significantly reduces fatigue for heavy logs, extending daily operational time. For high-volume professional production exceeding 500 logs\/hour, consider automatic or semi-automatic industrial log splitters.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eHow does the two-hand safety work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe system requires the simultaneous actuation of 2 control levers (one for each hand) to activate the hydraulic piston. If one lever is released, the piston stops immediately. This is a mandatory feature in Europe according to Machinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC for log splitters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe purpose is to eliminate the risk of crushing hands: with two-hand safety, both of the operator's hands are engaged on the levers, away from the splitting wedge and the log. European regulations explicitly prohibit log splitters without two-hand safety. WARNING: Bypassing safety (e.g., by applying weight to a lever) is illegal and creates a risk of serious injury: it is never acceptable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eCan I split logs with knots or branches?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, but with caution. The 16-ton force handles standard fresh wood logs without problems; logs with large knots, side branches, bifurcations, or dry, seasoned wood require greater force and may need multiple passes or repositioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor particularly difficult logs: reduce the size of the log before splitting (saw to 30-50 cm instead of 80-100 cm), position the log so that the wedge enters the softest point (not on the knot), and split gradually without forcing. For professional use with large, knotty industrial logs, consider higher force models: 16 t HS is suitable for typical logs, models with greater force handle extreme cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eDoes the hydraulic oil need to be replaced periodically?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. For daily professional use, it is recommended to change the hydraulic oil every 200-300 actual working hours (typically 1-2 times a year for intensive use). The tank capacity is 18 liters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecommended hydraulic oil: ISO VG 32 or ISO VG 46 for standard use (check manual for exact specifications). Complete replacement includes draining old oil, cleaning the tank, changing the hydraulic filter (if provided), and refilling with new oil. For occasional hobby use, the oil typically lasts 2-3 years before requiring replacement. Original Bernardo hydraulic oil or commercial equivalents (Shell Tellus, Mobil DTE, Total Azolla) are available from standard industrial suppliers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eHow is the HS 16 ZE log splitter transported?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe integrated wheeled trolley allows for easy movement over short distances (yard, shed, field). For road transport (truck, trailer), the 277 kg weight requires attention: loading with a ramp or crane, secure fastening during transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor transfers between agricultural\/forestry sites, a dedicated agricultural trailer is recommended. The retractable cylinder (for E\/ZE models) reduces the height in the transport position: machine dimension 1,400 × 1,500 × 2,500 mm is the operating dimension; for transport, the machine height can be reduced. Z and ZE versions with 3-point hitch can be connected directly to the tractor for field handling.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50696270545224,"sku":"14-1209","price":2031.37,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_HS_16_ZE_Spaccalegna_verticale_elettrico_e_cardano.jpg?v=1756810341"},{"product_id":"spaccalegna-hs-30-ze","title":"Bernardo HS 30 ZE Vertical Log Splitter – 30-ton splitting force, dual power: 5.5 kW 400V three-phase electric + PTO shaft, weight 372 kg","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo HS 30 ZE vertical log splitter is sized for splitting logs in agricultural, forestry, and heavy professional work on large logs. It offers a splitting force of 30 tons, a maximum piston stroke of 948 mm, a workable log length of up to 1,100 mm, dual power supply: a 5.5 kW three-phase 400V electric motor or a power take-off (PTO) for use with a tractor, and a 30-liter hydraulic tank. Two-hand safety compliant with European regulations, an integrated log lifter for loading heavy logs, a robust 372 kg structure with a wheeled trolley for transport, and overall dimensions of 1,400 × 1,500 × 2,500 mm. Distributed in Italy by Krollit as the official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSplitting force:\u003c\/strong\u003e 30 tons\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax. piston stroke:\u003c\/strong\u003e 948 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkable log length:\u003c\/strong\u003e up to 1,100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDrive:\u003c\/strong\u003e Dual: electric 5.5 kW \/ 400V three-phase + PTO shaft (PTO)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHydraulic tank:\u003c\/strong\u003e 30 liters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSafety:\u003c\/strong\u003e Two-handed operation\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLog lifter:\u003c\/strong\u003e Integrated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 372 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the HS 30 ZE and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo HS 30 ZE is a vertical log splitter sized for professional forestry companies, sawmills, and industrial firewood suppliers. The 30-ton force is designed for large logs of hardwood (centuries-old oak, elm, ash) up to Ø 500 mm. The dual power supply (electric 5.5 kW 400V three-phase + PTO shaft) is a distinctive feature: in the workshop\/shed, the electric motor is used for consistent work; in the field (e.g., in forests, remote locations without electrical connection), the PTO shaft connected to the tractor's power take-off is used. This is a crucial feature for those who alternate between workshop work and field harvesting. The integrated log lifter is a key design feature for heavy logs: it lifts logs to the hydraulic piston without the operator having to manually lift logs that can weigh 50-100 kg. The two-hand safety system requires both hands of the operator to activate the piston, eliminating the risk of hand crushing during splitting. Among Krollit's customers, the HS 30 ZE log splitter is chosen by professional forestry companies, sawmills, industrial firewood suppliers, biomass district heating plants, and agricultural contractors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo HS log splitter range is organized into 7 models by splitting force and drive, grouped into 3 sub-families: E family (electric only): HS 11 E (11 t, single-phase 230V), HS 14 E (14 t, three-phase 400V), HS 16 E (16 t, three-phase 400V); ZE family (dual: electric + PTO shaft): HS 16 ZE (16 t), HS 22 ZE (22 t), HS 30 ZE (30 t); Z family (PTO shaft only): HS 30 Z (30 t). \n\nThe HS 30 ZE model is the dual-drive version (electric + PTO shaft) of its respective nominal force. The ZE family includes 3 forces: 16 t (HS 16 ZE), 22 t (HS 22 ZE), 30 t (HS 30 ZE). Increase force for larger logs and harder wood: HS 22 ZE suitable for oak\/beech Ø 350-400 mm, HS 30 ZE for industrial logs Ø 500 mm. For exclusive field applications without electrical power, the corresponding Z version (HS 30 Z) is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics and Krollit support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). The HS 30 ZE log splitter, weighing 372 kg, is shipped on a protective pallet. For unloading, a pallet jack or crane is recommended: the machine is imposing and requires technical personnel for positioning. Dimensions 1,400 × 1,500 × 2,500 mm: check the available height of the storage room (the machine has a retractable cylinder to reduce height during storage). Hydraulic oil, wedge spare parts (cutting wedges, wedge guide), hydraulic pumps, valves, original Bernardo log lifter spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the HS 30 ZE for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial 30-ton machine for professional use: oversized for even advanced hobby use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional forestry company \/ sawmill\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 t force for industrial logs up to Ø 500 mm in hardwood. Dual drive for workshop and field use with a tractor.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAgricultural contractor \/ district heating plants\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor professional high-volume firewood production. 30 l tank and hydraulic pumps sized for continuous use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e applications with exclusive workshop use with electrical connection (the equivalent E version is more economical); applications with exclusive field use with a tractor (the corresponding Z version is more economical); occasional hobby use (30 t force is oversized; consider HS 11 E or HS 14 E); use in enclosed spaces without ventilation (adequate ventilation is recommended for prolonged use, even if the electric machine does not generate fumes); use by untrained personnel on safety (the log splitter is a dangerous machine: two-hand safety is mandatory).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSplitting capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. splitting force\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 tons\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkable log length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eup to 1,100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. piston stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e948 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdvance speed (work)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHydraulic system\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydraulic tank capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydraulic pumps\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh quality for continuous use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDual drive\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMode 1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElectric motor 5.5 kW \/ 400V three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMode 2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePTO shaft (PTO) for tractor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSafety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eControl system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo-handed operation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLog lifter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWedge guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid and precise\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × D × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,400 × 1,500 × 2,500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 372 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo HS 30 ZE vertical log splitter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated log lifter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheeled trolley for transport\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo-hand safety system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSolid and precise wedge guide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOptional 3-point hitch (for tractor use)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser and safety manual in Italian\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOfficial Bernardo warranty\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eHow long does a typical split take?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor medium-sized logs (Ø 200-300 mm), a complete split typically takes 8-15 seconds: 3-5 seconds for the piston to advance (at the nominal adjustable speed), 2-5 seconds for cutting the wood, 3-5 seconds for return. For larger logs or hardwood, the time extends.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor series production (e.g., preparing firewood for the winter season), the typical rate is 200-400 logs\/hour with an experienced operator. The integrated log lifter significantly reduces fatigue for heavy logs, extending daily operating time. For professional high-volume production over 500 logs\/hour, consider automatic or semi-automatic industrial log splitters.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eHow does the two-hand safety system work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe system requires the simultaneous actuation of 2 control levers (one for each hand) to activate the hydraulic piston. If one lever is released, the piston stops immediately. This feature is legally mandatory in Europe according to Machinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC for log splitters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe purpose is to eliminate the risk of hand crushing: with two-hand safety, both hands of the operator are engaged on the levers, away from the cutting wedge and the log. European regulations explicitly prohibit log splitters without two-hand safety. WARNING: bypassing the safety (e.g., by applying weight to a lever) is illegal and creates a risk of serious injury: it is never acceptable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eCan I split logs with knots or branches?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, but with caution. The 30-ton force handles standard fresh wood logs without problems; logs with large knots, side branches, bifurcations, or dry-seasoned wood require higher force and may require multiple passes or repositioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor particularly difficult logs: reduce the log size before splitting (saw to 30-50 cm instead of 80-100 cm), position the log so that the wedge enters the softest point (not on the knot), split gradually without forcing. For professional use with large, knotty industrial logs, consider higher-force models: 30-ton HS is adequate for typical logs, higher-force models handle extreme cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eDoes the hydraulic oil need to be changed periodically?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. For daily professional use, it is recommended to change the hydraulic oil every 200-300 hours of actual work (typically 1-2 times a year for intensive use). The tank is 30 liters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecommended hydraulic oil: ISO VG 32 or ISO VG 46 for standard use (check manual for exact specifications). Complete replacement includes draining the old oil, cleaning the tank, changing the hydraulic filter (if provided), and refilling with new oil. For occasional hobby use, the oil typically lasts 2-3 years before needing replacement. Original Bernardo hydraulic oil or commercial equivalents (Shell Tellus, Mobil DTE, Total Azolla) are available from standard industrial suppliers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eHow is the HS 30 ZE log splitter transported?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe integrated wheeled trolley allows for easy movement over short distances (yard, shed, field). For road transport (truck, trailer), the 372 kg weight requires attention: loading with a ramp or crane, secure fastening during transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor moving between agricultural\/forestry sites, a dedicated agricultural trailer is recommended. The retractable cylinder (for E\/ZE models) reduces the height in transport position: machine dimensions 1,400 × 1,500 × 2,500 mm are the operating dimensions; for transport, the machine can be reduced in height. The Z and ZE versions with 3-point hitch can be connected directly to the tractor for field handling.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50696276148552,"sku":"14-1212","price":2657.25,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_HS_30_ZE_Spaccalegna_verticale_con_doppia_alimentazione.jpg?v=1756808508"},{"product_id":"bernardo-tornio-metallo-hobby-350-vdm-230-v","title":"Metal Lathe Bernardo Hobby 350 VDM – center distance 350 mm, digital display for speed + compound rest, automatic feeds, 0.35 kW motor, 230V single-phase, weight 44 kg","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Hobby 350 VDM bench lathe is sized for advanced hobbyists and small workshops with precision needs and a digital display. Center distance 350 mm, center height 90 mm, swing over bed Ø 180 mm, spindle bore Ø 21 mm MT 3 taper, speed range 100 - 1,200 \/ 100 - 3,000 rpm (dual range, continuous adjustment). Longitudinal feeds 0.1 \/ 0.2 mm\/rev. Metric threads (10) 0.4 - 2.0 mm. Self-centering chuck Ø 80 mm, motor 0.35 kW (S1 100%) - 0.5 kW (S6 40%) at 230V single-phase, weight 44 kg, machine dimensions 770 × 300 × 310 mm (without stand). Distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDistance between centers:\u003c\/strong\u003e 350 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCenter height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 90 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSwing over bed:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 180 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle bore:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 21 mm MT 3 taper\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpeed range:\u003c\/strong\u003e 100 - 1,200 \/ 100 - 3,000 rpm (dual range, continuous adjustment)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSelf-centering chuck:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 80 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLongitudinal feeds:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.1 \/ 0.2 mm\/rev\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMetric threads:\u003c\/strong\u003e (10) 0.4 - 2.0 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDigital display:\u003c\/strong\u003e Speed + cross and top slide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.35 kW (S1) \/ 0.5 kW (S6) - 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 44 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Hobby 350 VDM and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Hobby 350 VDM is an intermediate bench lathe in the Hobby range with a distinctive feature: a digital display included for spindle speed and for cross slide and top slide position. The Hobby 350 VDM model is the M ('Multi-turret') version of the 350 VD: same mechanical characteristics as the 350 VD (distance between centers, chuck, motor, speeds, dimensions, weight) but with additional turret equipment: in addition to the quick-change tool post (size 5-4 with 4 inserts) it also includes a traditional 4-position tool post. The advantage: the operator can configure the traditional tool post for standard operations (turning, roughing, finishing tools) and use the quick-change tool post for quick changes of special tools (threading, specific roughing). Significantly reduces setup times for productions with complex machining cycles. Suitable for advanced hobbyists, small artisan workshops, technical schools with educational laboratories, restorers of mechanical components. For intensive daily professional use, consider the Hobby 500 range (130 kg, 4-step automatic feeds, complete metric+inch threading).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Hobby metal lathe range is organized by progressive dimensions and technical characteristics: Hobby 140 (140 mm distance between centers, 14 kg weight) and Hobby 250 (250 mm, 23 kg) are entry-level mini lathes without display, 0.15 kW motor; Hobby 350 VD (350 mm, 44 kg), Hobby 350 VDM (M version with additional turret) and Hobby 400 Super (400 mm, 50 kg) are intermediate models with digital display and quick-change tool post, 0.35-0.50 kW motor; Hobby 500 in 230V single-phase and 400V three-phase versions (130 kg, 0.55 kW motor) is the top of the Hobby range with automatic feeds, complete threading and 6-step speed change. Beyond the Hobby range are the Profi models (semi-professional, 200-500 kg) and the heavy industrial Goliath lathes (over 1,500 kg, 5-15 kW motors). \n\nThe Hobby 350 VDM differs from the Hobby 350 VD by its double turret equipment: quick-change tool post + traditional 4-position tool post. Practical difference: the VDM allows two different turrets to be kept ready, reducing changeover times for complex machining cycles. For simple productions, the Hobby 350 VD is significantly more economical. For larger workpieces (over 350 mm), the Hobby 400 Super (400 mm distance between centers) is correctly sized; for professional use, the Hobby 500.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). With a weight of 44 kg, it can be handled by one person; the lathe is sized for placement on an existing sturdy workbench. Tool post inserts, additional self-centering chucks, spare steel gears, original Bernardo accessories and spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the Hobby 350 VDM is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdvanced hobbyist \/ small craftsman\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital display for speed + carriage, quick-change tool post with 4 inserts. Dual turret (quick-change + traditional 4-position) for complex machining cycles. 350 mm distance between centers and Ø 80 mm chuck for medium-large workpieces.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTechnical school \/ professional teaching laboratory\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital display for modern teaching: students learn digital reading of carriage movements. Robustness suitable for intensive use by multiple operators.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop producing unique pieces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable for single pieces or small series. For regular production with automatic feeds and complete threading, the Hobby 500 (130 kg) or Profi (over 200 kg) models are correctly sized.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e complete metric + inch threading (the Hobby 500 with 11 metric + 11 inch is the correct choice); intensive continuous professional use (the Hobby 500 with 130 kg robustness is correctly sized); very large workpieces (over Ø 180 mm on the bed; the Hobby 500 with Ø 220 mm is the correct choice).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCenter height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwing over bed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwing over cross slide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle bore\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 21 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle bore taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSelf-centering chuck\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeeds and feeds\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed range\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 - 1,200 \/ 100 - 3,000 rpm (dual range, continuous adjustment)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLongitudinal feeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.1 \/ 0.2 mm\/rev\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThreads\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetric threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e(10) 0.4 - 2.0 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTailstock\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock quill travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 100%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.35 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 40%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDigital display\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital LCD display\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCross and top slide indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital display included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e770 × 300 × 310 mm (without stand)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e44 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo Hobby 350 VDM Lathe\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSelf-centering chuck Ø 80 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle guard\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eQuick-change tool post (size 5-4) with 4 inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTraditional 4-position tool post\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpare steel gears\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSplash guard\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital speed indication\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital display for cross and top slide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFixed tailstock\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTool kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser manual in Italian\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs 230V single-phase power truly professional?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the Hobby range, yes. The 0.35 kW (S1) - 0.5 kW (S6) motor is sized for continuous use at 230V single-phase. The machine is designed for advanced hobby use and small workshops, not for intensive industrial production.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecommended check before installation: electrical line with adequate cross-section (minimum 2.5 mm² cable), dedicated 16A miniature circuit breaker, CEE 16A 230V industrial socket (preferable to a \"Schuko\" domestic socket for professional use). For workshops with other simultaneous loads (compressors, extractors), check the available power on the meter. For intensive daily industrial use, a lathe with a 400V three-phase motor (400V version of the Hobby 500 or Profi range) is recommended.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eWhat workpieces can I machine with the Hobby 350 VDM?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypical workpieces: cylindrical turning of shafts and cylinders up to Ø 180 mm and 350 mm length between centers, facing, grooving, chamfering and filleting, threading (10) 0.4 - 2.0 mm metric. Typical materials: mild steels (Fe360, S235), alloy steels (C45, 39NiCrMo3), aluminum and light alloys, brass, bronze, technical plastics.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachining limits: maximum Ø on bed 180 mm, Ø on cross slide 110 mm, spindle bore Ø 21 mm (maximum limit for thru-bars). For larger workpieces, the higher models in the range or industrial lathes (Profi range 200-500 kg or Goliath 1,500-3,500 kg) are correctly sized. For hobby\/small workshop use, it is correctly sized for most standard needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the machine already complete or are additional accessories needed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine comes with standard equipment sufficient for immediate use: Ø 80 mm self-centering chuck, quick-change tool post with 4 inserts, fixed tailstock, spindle guard, splash guard, tool kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOptional accessories typically purchased separately: self-centering chucks of different diameters for specific workpieces, steady rests for long workpieces, 4-jaw chuck for non-cylindrical workpieces, additional turning tool sets (roughing, finishing, threading, drilling), revolving tailstock (if the machine has a fixed tailstock). For most standard hobby machining, the basic equipment is sufficient; for specific productions or particular workpieces, dedicated accessories should be considered.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eHow is the dual speed range (100-1,200 \/ 100-3,000 rpm) selected?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe selection between the two ranges is done via mechanical change (selection lever on the lathe head): low range 100-1,200 rpm for high torque on hard materials or large workpieces, high range 100-3,000 rpm for fast finishes on soft materials and small workpieces. Within each range, the speed is continuously adjustable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe optimal speed depends on: material (mild steels 80-150 m\/min, hard steels 50-80 m\/min, aluminum 200-400 m\/min), workpiece diameter (linear cutting speed must be constant), type of operation (roughing lower speeds, finishing higher speeds). For regular production, it is recommended to record optimal speeds on a work sheet for reference.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eCan I install the Hobby 350 VDM on any workbench?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, on sturdy workbenches with a load capacity greater than the weight of the machine (44 kg) plus the workpieces being machined. The workbench must be stable and level: workbench instability causes vibrations during turning that compromise work precision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor home workshops or schools, a sturdy carpenter's bench (e.g., WB 1500 Hobby or WB 2000 Hobby from the Bernardo range) with a solid beech wood top is recommended. For advanced hobby use, consider a dedicated lathe stand (made of steel sheet) for greater stability. Important: the machine must be fixed to the workbench with through bolts in the designated base holes to prevent sliding during machining.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50696366817608,"sku":"03-1029","price":1163.92,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_Hobby_350_VDM_Tornio_compatto_per_hobbisti_e_piccoli_laboratori.jpg?v=1756990714"},{"product_id":"bernardo-tornio-metallo-hobby-400-super","title":"Bernardo Hobby 400 Super Metal Lathe – 400 mm distance between centers, digital speed display + carriage, automatic feeds, 0.5 kW motor, 230V single-phase, 50 kg weight","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Hobby 400 Super bench lathe is sized for advanced hobbyists and small artisan workshops requiring precision and a digital display. It features a distance between centers of 400 mm, a center height of 90 mm, a turning diameter over the bed of Ø 180 mm, a spindle bore of Ø 20 mm (MT 3 taper), and a speed range of 100 - 2,500 rpm (continuously variable). Longitudinal feeds are 0.1 \/ 0.2 mm\/rev. Metric threads include (10) 0.4 - 2.0 mm. It comes with a Ø 100 mm self-centering chuck, a 0.5 kW (S1 100%) - 0.7 kW (S6 40%) single-phase 230V motor, weighs 50 kg, and has machine dimensions of 850 × 280 × 300 mm (without base). Distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDistance between centers:\u003c\/strong\u003e 400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCenter height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 90 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurning diameter over bed:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 180 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle bore:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 20 mm MT 3 taper\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpeed range:\u003c\/strong\u003e 100 - 2,500 rpm (continuously variable)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSelf-centering chuck:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLongitudinal feeds:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.1 \/ 0.2 mm\/rev\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMetric threads:\u003c\/strong\u003e (10) 0.4 - 2.0 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDigital display:\u003c\/strong\u003e Speed + cross and top slide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.5 kW (S1) \/ 0.7 kW (S6) - 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Hobby 400 Super and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Hobby 400 Super is an intermediate bench lathe in the Hobby range with a distinctive feature: a digital display included for spindle speed and for the position of the cross slide and top slide. The Hobby 400 Super model is the top of the entry-level\/intermediate range: 400 mm distance between centers (the widest among compact models), 50 kg weight. Continuously variable speed 100-2,500 rpm (single range, simpler than the mechanical gear change of the 350 VD). Spindle bore Ø 20 mm MT3 taper with Ø 100 mm self-centering chuck (larger than the 350 models with Ø 80 mm). Quick-change tool post (size 5-4) with 4 inserts. More powerful motor than the 350 (0.50 kW S1 \/ 0.70 kW S6 vs 0.35\/0.50 for the 350s) for more demanding work. Longitudinal feeds 0.1 \/ 0.2 mm\/rev and 10-step metric threads (0.4 - 2.0 mm). Suitable for advanced hobbyists, small artisan workshops, technical schools with educational workshops, restorers of mechanical components. For intensive daily professional use, consider the Hobby 500 range (130 kg, 4-step automatic feeds, full metric + inch threads).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Hobby metal lathe range is organized by progressive size and technical characteristics: Hobby 140 (140 mm distance between centers, 14 kg weight) and Hobby 250 (250 mm, 23 kg) are entry-level mini lathes without display, 0.15 kW motor; Hobby 350 VD (350 mm, 44 kg), Hobby 350 VDM (M version with additional turret) and Hobby 400 Super (400 mm, 50 kg) are intermediate models with digital display and quick-change tool post, 0.35-0.50 kW motor; Hobby 500 in 230V single-phase and 400V three-phase versions (130 kg, 0.55 kW motor) is the top of the Hobby range with automatic feeds, full threading, and 6-step speed change. Beyond the Hobby range are the Profi models (semi-professional, 200-500 kg) and the heavy industrial Goliath lathes (over 1,500 kg, 5-15 kW motors).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Hobby 400 Super is intermediate in the range: digital display for precise control, quick-change tool post for productivity. For smaller parts (entry-level), the Hobby 140\/250 models are significantly cheaper. For regular production with automatic feeds and full threading, the Hobby 500 is correctly sized.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). With a weight of 50 kg, it can be moved by one person; the lathe is sized for placement on an existing sturdy workbench. Inserts for tool post, additional self-centering chucks, spare steel gears, original Bernardo accessories and spare parts available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the Hobby 400 Super is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdvanced hobbyist \/ small artisan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital display for speed + carriage, quick-change tool post with 4 inserts. Quick tool change during machining. 400 mm distance between centers and Ø 100 mm chuck for medium-large pieces.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTechnical school \/ professional educational laboratory\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital display for modern teaching: students learn digital reading of carriage movements. Robustness suitable for intensive use by multiple operators.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop producing unique pieces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable for single pieces or small series. For regular production with automatic feeds and full threading, the Hobby 500 (130 kg) or Profi (over 200 kg) models are correctly sized.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e full metric + imperial threading (the Hobby 500 with 11 metric + 11 imperial is the correct choice); intensive continuous professional use (the Hobby 500 with 130 kg of robustness is correctly sized); very large pieces (over Ø 180 mm on the bed; the Hobby 500 with Ø 220 mm is the correct choice).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMachining capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCenter height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTurning diameter over bed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTurning diameter over cross slide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle bore\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSelf-centering chuck\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeeds and feeds\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed range\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 - 2,500 rpm (continuously variable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLongitudinal feeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.1 \/ 0.2 mm\/rev\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThreading\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetric threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e(10) 0.4 - 2.0 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTailstock\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock quill travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e55 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 100%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 40%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.7 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDigital display\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital LCD display\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCross and top slide indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital display included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 × 280 × 300 mm (without base)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo Hobby 400 Super lathe\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eØ 100 mm self-centering chuck\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle guard\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eQuick-change tool post (size 5-4) with 4 inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpare steel gears\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSplash guard\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital speed indication\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital display for cross and top slide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFixed tailstock\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTool kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser manual in Italian\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs 230V single-phase power truly professional?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the Hobby range, yes. The 0.5 kW (S1) - 0.7 kW (S6) motor is sized for continuous use at 230V single-phase. The machine is sized for advanced hobbyist use and small artisan workshops, not for intensive industrial production.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecommended check before installation: electrical line with adequate cross-section (minimum 2.5 mm² cable), dedicated 16A circuit breaker, CEE 16A 230V industrial socket (preferable to a standard 'Schuko' socket for professional use). For workshops with other simultaneous loads (compressors, extractors), check the available power on the meter. For intensive daily industrial use, a lathe with a 400V three-phase motor is recommended (400V version of the Hobby 500 or Profi range).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eWhat kind of pieces can I work with the Hobby 400 Super?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypical pieces: cylindrical turning of shafts and cylinders up to Ø 180 mm and 400 mm length between centers, facing, grooving, chamfering and filleting, threading (10) 0.4 - 2.0 mm metric. Typical materials: mild steels (Fe360, S235), alloy steels (C45, 39NiCrMo3), aluminum and light alloys, brass, bronze, engineering plastics.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachining limits: maximum Ø over bed 180 mm, Ø over cross slide 110 mm, spindle bore Ø 20 mm (maximum limit for through bars). For larger pieces, the higher-end models or industrial lathes (Profi range 200-500 kg or Goliath 1,500-3,500 kg) are correctly sized. For hobbyist\/small laboratory use, it is correctly sized for most standard needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the machine already complete or do I need additional accessories?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine is supplied with standard equipment sufficient for immediate use: Ø 100 mm self-centering chuck, quick-change tool post with 4 inserts, fixed tailstock, spindle guard, splash guard, tool kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOptional accessories typically purchased separately: self-centering chucks of different diameters for specific pieces, steady rests for long pieces, 4-jaw chuck for non-cylindrical pieces, additional turning tool sets (roughing, finishing, threading, drilling), live center (if the machine has a fixed tailstock). For most standard hobbyist work, the basic equipment is sufficient; for specific productions or particular pieces, consider dedicated accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the continuously variable speed of 100-2,500 rpm suitable for all materials?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, for hobbyist\/small laboratory use. The 100-2,500 rpm range covers all typical needs: low speed (100-300 rpm) for hard materials and large pieces, standard speed (500-1,500 rpm) for turning mild steels, high speed (1,800-2,500 rpm) for finishing on soft materials and small pieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOptimal speed depends on: material (mild steels 80-150 m\/min, hard steels 50-80 m\/min, aluminum 200-400 m\/min), workpiece diameter (linear cutting speed must be constant), type of machining (lower speeds for roughing, higher speeds for finishing). For regular productions, it is recommended to record optimal speeds on a job card for reference.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eCan I install the Hobby 400 Super on any workbench?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, on sturdy workbenches with a load capacity greater than the machine's weight (50 kg) plus the workpieces. The workbench must be stable and level: workbench instability causes vibrations during turning, which compromises work precision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor home workshops or schools, a robust woodworking bench is recommended (e.g., WB 1500 Hobby or WB 2000 Hobby from the Bernardo range) with a solid beech wood top. For advanced hobbyist use, consider a dedicated lathe base (made of steel sheet) for greater stability. Important: the machine must be secured to the workbench with through bolts in the designated base holes to prevent sliding during machining.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50696370159944,"sku":"03-1028B","price":1220.65,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_Tornio_Patrona_Hobby_400_Super_compatto_da_banco.jpg?v=1757321491"},{"product_id":"tornio-legno-db-450","title":"Bernardo Wood Lathe DB 450 – distance between centers 420 mm (up to 1070 mm with extension), Ø 300 mm over bed, M33 × 3.5 spindle, 0.55 kW 230V single-phase motor, LED display, weight 36 kg","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo DB 450 woodturning lathe is sized for semi-professional hobbyists with continuous work requirements: complete equipment with integrated lighting and 24 indexing positions for precise workpiece clamping. Distance between centers 420 mm (extendable up to 1070 mm with optional extension), turning diameter over bed Ø 300 mm, over tool rest Ø 230 mm. Spindle speed 480-3,800 rpm (continuous adjustment, 2 ranges). Spindle thread M33 × 3.5 mm, tailstock taper MT 2, tailstock quill travel 50 mm. Motor 0.55 kW (S1) - 0.75 kW (S6) at 230V single-phase, weight 36 kg, machine dimensions 970 × 300 × 440 mm. LED display for digital speed readout. 24 indexing positions for precise workpiece clamping during complex operations. Integrated work light. Distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDistance between centers:\u003c\/strong\u003e 420 mm (up to 1070 mm with extension)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurning diameter over bed:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurning diameter over tool rest:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 230 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 480-3,800 rpm (continuous adjustment, 2 ranges)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle thread:\u003c\/strong\u003e M33 × 3.5 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTailstock taper:\u003c\/strong\u003e MT 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTailstock quill travel:\u003c\/strong\u003e 50 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.55 kW (S1) \/ 0.75 kW (S6) - 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLED display:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital speed readout\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIndexing positions:\u003c\/strong\u003e 24 positions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 36 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the DB 450 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo DB 450 is a semi-professional woodturning lathe from the DB category with distinctive features: integrated tool storage compartment and work light included as standard equipment, in addition to 24 indexing positions for precise workpiece clamping during complex operations (decorations, repeated profiling). Distance between centers 420 mm (extendable up to 1,070 mm with optional extension), turning diameter Ø 300 mm over bed and Ø 230 mm over tool rest. Continuously adjustable speed 480-3,800 rpm across 2 selectable ranges (480-1,800 \/ 900-3,800 rpm). Tailstock taper MT 2, motor 0.55 kW (S1) - 0.75 kW (S6) at 230V single-phase. LED display for real-time speed readout. Through-hole in tailstock for long workpiece processing, adjustable steel tool rest with quick-release lever. In Krollit customers' workshops, the DB 450 is chosen by semi-professional artisans who regularly produce decorative turned items: goblets, bowls with regular decorations, shaped handles, furniture feet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo wood lathe range is organized into 4 progressive categories by weight and features: DM (Drechselbank Mini, 20-38 kg) entry-level for hobbyists; DB (semi-pro 36 kg) compact with standard professional accessories; VDM (semi-pro 50 kg) intermediate with 3 speed ranges; HCL (High Cast iron Lathe, 125-212 kg) heavy professional with cast iron structure and integrated Delta frequency inverter.\n\nThe DB 450 is a compact semi-professional lathe: 36 kg with complete equipment (work light, 24 indexing positions, tool storage compartment). For producing larger pieces, the VDM 500 (50 kg, 3 speed ranges) or the professional HCL range (125+ kg) are correctly sized.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). With a weight of 36 kg, it can be handled by one person; the lathe is sized for placement on an existing sturdy workbench (capacity 80+ kg). Additional tool rests, faceplates, live centers, bed extensions (for compatible models), original Bernardo accessories and spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the DB 450 is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSemi-professional hobbyist \/ amateur craftsman\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eComplete equipment with work light, 24 indexing positions, integrated tool storage compartment. Suitable for continuous use in a dedicated workshop.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFurniture restorer \/ craftsman specializing in small turned items\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 24 indexing positions allow precise workpiece clamping to replicate repeated profiling (chair legs, candlesticks with recurring patterns). LED display for speed control.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTechnical school with professional workshop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSemi-professional machine suitable for advanced woodturning instruction. Adequate robustness for intensive use by multiple students.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e intensive daily professional use (the professional HCL range 125+ kg is correctly sized); large pieces over Ø 300 mm or over 1070 mm in length; three-phase 400V power supply (Bernardo wood lathes are only 230V single-phase); CNC programmed turning (Bernardo lathes are manual); environments without adequate chip extraction (woodworking produces abundant chips and dust requiring adequate extraction).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e420 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance with extension (optional)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1070 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTurning diameter over bed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTurning diameter over tool rest\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e480-3,800 rpm (continuous adjustment, 2 ranges)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow range (L)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e480-1,800 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh range (H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e900-3,800 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle and tailstock\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle thread\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM33 × 3.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock quill travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 100%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.55 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 40%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.75 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V single-phase \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdditional features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLED display\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital speed readout\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndexing positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24 positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork light\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTool storage compartment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e970 × 300 × 440 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e36 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo DB 450 wood lathe\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e150 mm tool rest\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e80 mm faceplate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrive center\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLive center\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLED speed indicator\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated work light\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated tool storage compartment\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTool set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser manual in Italian\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between the DB 450 and the lower\/higher models in the range?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo wood lathe range is organized into 4 categories: DM (entry-level mini, 20-38 kg), DB (semi-pro 36 kg with light and 24 indexing positions), VDM (intermediate 50 kg, 3 speed ranges), HCL (professional 125-212 kg with inverter or DC motor and heavy cast iron structure). The DB 450 is positioned in the DB HOBBY category: a compact semi-professional lathe with complete equipment (light, 24 indexing positions, tool compartment).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDistinctive features of the DB 450: Integrated tool storage compartment and work light included as standard equipment. 24 indexing positions for precise workpiece clamping. To choose the right model, consider: weight of the workpiece, frequency of use, precision requirements, availability of dedicated accessories (light, indexing). For most artisan workshops, a mid-range model (VDM 500 or HCL 600 P) balances capacity and price.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eWhich spindle speed should I choose for each type of wood?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGeneral guidelines for spindle speed based on wood type and workpiece diameter: softwoods (pine, spruce) and small pieces require high speeds (1,500-3,000 rpm), hardwoods (beech, oak, cherry) and medium pieces require medium speeds (700-1,500 rpm), very large pieces (Ø over 200 mm) or exotic woods require low speeds (300-700 rpm) for rotational control. The DB 450 covers this range with its 480-3,800 rpm (continuous adjustment, 2 ranges).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eImportant: safety in woodturning requires lower speeds for large or unbalanced pieces. An unbalanced raw piece at high speed causes vibrations and a risk of the piece being thrown. Standard procedure: start at low speed to balance the piece (roughing), then gradually increase the speed as the piece becomes more cylindrical. For exotic woods or pieces of uncertain origin (branches, stumps), always start with minimum speed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the machine already complete, or do I need additional accessories?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard equipment includes: complete machine, tool rests (one or more standard sizes), faceplate, drive center, live center, LED display, integrated work light, integrated tool storage compartment, turning tool set.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOptional accessories typically purchased separately: bed extensions for longer pieces (compatible with models that allow it), tool rests of different lengths, faceplates of larger diameters, self-centering wood chucks (compatible with M33 thread), additional turning tool sets (roughing, finishing, gouges, specific profiles), external turning accessories (for pieces that do not fit between centers). For most standard operations, the basic equipment is sufficient.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eWhat does M33 × 3.5 mm spindle thread mean and why is it important?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eM33 × 3.5 mm is the standard spindle thread for the Bernardo wood lathe range. Dimensions: 33 mm diameter with 3.5 mm pitch. It is the European market standard for hobby and semi-professional lathes, compatible with most woodturning accessories available on the market.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePractical advantage: the M33 thread allows you to purchase self-centering chucks, faceplates, external turning accessories, and other accessories from different suppliers (Bernardo, Holzmann, Record Power, Axminster) without compatibility issues. For lathes from other brands with non-standard threads (e.g., 1\" × 8 TPI American, M30 × 3.5 of some industrial lathes), accessories are limited to those from the original manufacturer. All Bernardo wood lathes in the DM\/DB\/VDM\/HCL range have the same M33 × 3.5 mm thread: accessories are interchangeable between different models.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eDo I need a dedicated extraction system for the lathe?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecommended yes, especially for continuous use. Woodturning produces chips and dust of variable diameter (from large chips to fine wood dust). Large chips fall into the area under the machine, fine dust disperses into the workshop air.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor occasional use (a few hours a week), manual cleaning may be sufficient. For continuous use, a filter bag extractor (e.g., Bernardo DC range) connected to the integrated extraction port on many lathes (or positioned near the turning area for ambient capture) is correctly sized. Important: fine dust from hardwood (beech, oak, mahogany) is carcinogenic upon prolonged inhalation; effective extraction is recommended for operator health. For exotic woods (rosewood, ebony), even greater care is needed: also use FFP3 masks in addition to extraction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50696497594696,"sku":"10-1077","price":481.67,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Tornio_DB_450_compatto_e_professionale.jpg?v=1753190048"},{"product_id":"bernardo-trapani-sb-30-profi","title":"Bernardo Pillar Drill SB 30 Profi with 2-speed motor – drilling Ø 32 mm, MT 3 taper, continuous speed 105-1,725 rpm, R\/L rotation, spindle stroke 120 mm, motor 0.55\/0.85 kW 400V, weight 245 kg","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SB 30 Profi pillar drill is a heavy-duty professional machine for industrial workshops, with drilling capacity in steel up to Ø 32 mm and a 2-stage power motor for variable torque. Technical specifications: MT 3 Morse taper spindle, 1-13 mm chuck with B16 shank, continuously adjustable spindle speed from 105 to 1,725 rpm, highly stable grey cast iron structure (weight 245 kg), Ø 100 mm column for rigidity, 400 × 320 mm cast iron table with 14 mm T-slots, height-adjustable with rack, base with T-slots for clamping bulky workpieces, left\/right spindle rotation for tapping, integrated digital speed display, LED work lamp. 2-stage motor: 0.55 \/ 0.85 kW (S1) - 0.80 \/ 1.2 kW (S6) at 400V three-phase, max spindle-to-table distance 690 mm, spindle-to-base distance 1,180 mm, spindle stroke 120 mm. Distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDrilling capacity in steel:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 32 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eChuck:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1-13 mm \/ B 16\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMorse taper mount:\u003c\/strong\u003e MT 3\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e continuous 105-1,725 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle stroke:\u003c\/strong\u003e 120 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTable:\u003c\/strong\u003e 400 × 320 mm with 14 mm T-slots\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax spindle-to-table distance:\u003c\/strong\u003e 690 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle-to-base distance:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,180 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColumn diameter:\u003c\/strong\u003e 100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDigital display:\u003c\/strong\u003e speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRight\/left rotation:\u003c\/strong\u003e for tapping\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.55\/0.85 kW (S1) \/ 0.80\/1.2 kW (S6) at 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 245 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SB 30 Profi and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SB 30 Profi is a heavy-duty pillar drill for professional industrial workshops, with stability and power characteristics significantly superior to the BM\/SBM\/B 430 models. Key constructive feature: the 2-stage power motor (0.55 \/ 0.85 kW S1) allows for speed selection with variable torque: low stage 105-300 rpm with maximum torque for Ø 20-32 mm tools on heavy steels, high stage 600-1,725 rpm for Ø 8-16 mm tools on standard steels. Highly stable grey cast iron structure with a weight of 245 kg: significantly superior to SBM (57-68 kg) and B 430 (100 kg) models for stability in heavy drilling. Ø 100 mm column: the most rigid in the Bernardo medium bench\/pillar drill range. Drilling capacity Ø 32 mm with MT 3 taper, spindle stroke 120 mm (vs 80 mm for BM\/SBM models): allows long drilling operations in a single spindle descent, avoiding multiple passes on deep holes. Right\/left spindle rotation for tapping M up to the machine's capacity. Typical application sectors: mechanical industry with heavy part production, metal carpentry for industrial structures, workshops for processing alloy steels and tough materials, industrial part prototyping workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo bench and pillar drill range is organized into 6 main sub-families: \u003cstrong\u003eTB\u003c\/strong\u003e (TB 14\/16\/20 T) entry-level with fixed B16 or MT 2 taper and step speeds; \u003cstrong\u003eBM T\u003c\/strong\u003e (BM 20\/25 T) intermediate with digital spindle stroke display and step speeds; \u003cstrong\u003eBM Vario\u003c\/strong\u003e (BM 16\/20 Vario) intermediate with continuously adjustable speed + centering laser; \u003cstrong\u003eSBM Vario\u003c\/strong\u003e (SBM 16\/20 Vario) pillar drill with greater height than BM Vario; \u003cstrong\u003eB 430 Vario\u003c\/strong\u003e medium-heavy pillar drill with 360° swiveling table and MT 3 spindle; \u003cstrong\u003eSB 30 Profi\u003c\/strong\u003e heavy pillar drill with 2-stage power motor, Ø 32 mm capacity. The SB 30 Profi is the heavy model in the medium column range: Ø 32 mm capacity with MT 3 taper, 2-stage power motor, weight 245 kg (vs 100 kg for the B 430 and 57-68 kg for the SBMs). For professional industrial workshops with heavy drilling requirements on industrial parts, it is the correct choice. For higher capacities, the industrial fixed column KBM models (KBM 25\/32\/40+) with fixed table and greater positioning precision are correctly sized.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). Due to significant weight, a pallet truck or crane is required for unloading from the transport vehicle and installation. HSS drill bits, milling chucks, tapping devices, LED lamps, original Bernardo spare parts (belts, motors, keyless chucks, taper shanks, T-nuts) available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the SB 30 Profi for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial workshops with heavy drilling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 32 mm capacity with 2-stage motor (0.55\/0.85 kW S1), 120 mm spindle stroke for deep holes, 245 kg cast iron structure for stability.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop with frequent M threading\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRight\/left rotation for tapping, significant tapping capacity with MT 3 taper.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop with standard use below Ø 25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOversized\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor standard use below Ø 25 mm, the B 430 Vario is economically preferable (weight 100 kg vs 245 kg, significantly lower price).\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e drilling diameters greater than Ø 32 mm (KBM fixed column models required); environments without space for industrial-sized machines (weight 245 kg, dimensions 470 × 810 × 1,710 mm); occasional hobby use (oversized, consider TB or BM).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMachining capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity in steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 32 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChuck\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1-13 mm \/ B 16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMorse taper mount\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeed and stroke\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed (continuous)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e105-1,725 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and working dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 × 320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable T-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e14 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-to-column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax spindle-to-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e690 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-to-base distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBase plate surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e320 × 340 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 100%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.55\/0.85 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 40%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.80\/1.2 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V three-phase \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProtection standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIP 54\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e470 × 810 × 1,710 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e245 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/CE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo SB 30 Profi drill\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKeyless chuck 1-13 mm \/ B 16\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTaper shank MT 3 \/ B 16\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital display: speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated LED work lamp\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle left\/right rotation function\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSet of T-nuts for workpiece clamping\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeight-adjustable guard with microswitch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSeparate emergency stop switch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSet of wrenches and service tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser manual in Italian\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eHow does the 2-stage power motor work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe motor has 2 internal electrical windings: low stage (0.55 kW S1, 0.80 kW S6) for maximum torque at low speeds (105-300 rpm) for Ø 25-32 mm tools on heavy steels; high stage (0.85 kW S1, 1.2 kW S6) for higher speeds (600-1,725 rpm) with reduced torque for Ø 8-16 mm tools on standard steels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe operator selects the stage via a dedicated switch depending on the material and tool. This is a crucial feature for: heavy applications requiring high torque on large tools (the high stage would be insufficient for Ø 32 mm on steel), light applications requiring high speeds (the low stage would be slow for Ø 8 mm on mild steel). Standard single-stage drills require a compromise between torque and speed: the SB 30 Profi eliminates this compromise.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the 120 mm spindle stroke significant?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, for deep holes. The 120 mm spindle stroke allows long drilling operations in a single spindle descent (vs 80 mm for BM\/SBM models): for deep holes 80-120 mm, multiple passes with spindle repositioning are not necessary.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a crucial feature for: through holes on thick parts 80-120 mm (structural steel, metal blocks, welded carpentry parts), holes for standard length pins, holes for long M threads (e.g., M16 × 100 mm). Without sufficient spindle stroke, the operator must perform drilling in multiple passes: stop the machine, return the spindle to the top, reposition the workpiece or extract the tool for chips, restart. This procedure is slow and carries a risk of misalignment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the 245 kg structure really more stable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, significantly. The weight of 245 kg vs 100 kg for the B 430 and 57-68 kg for the SBMs offers superior mass stability: during drilling, spindle vibrations are absorbed by the machine's mass instead of propagating to the workpiece or operator.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor heavy industrial applications, stability is a crucial feature for: hole quality (vibrations cause non-round holes and degraded tolerances), tool life (vibrations cause alternating stresses on the cutting edge, reducing useful life), operator comfort (vibrations propagate to the control levers). For heavy series production, the SB 30 Profi is correctly sized.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the digital speed display accurate?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, with a typical resolution of 1 rpm. The display shows the actual spindle rotation speed measured by an inductive sensor: in case of heavy load, the actual speed may be slightly lower than the set speed (load-induced slowdown effect).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a crucial feature for: series production with verification of machining speed, precision applications requiring specific speed to optimize hole quality, operator training (the display shows in real-time how speed varies according to load). Without a digital display, the operator estimates the speed based on the control's position: an approximate estimate with a typical error margin of ±10%.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eDoes R\/L rotation allow standard threading?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The right\/left spindle rotation allows M threading using a tap: clockwise rotation cuts the thread (advancing the tap into the material), counter-clockwise rotation ejects the tap from the hole (returning to the initial position).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor precision threading, the SB 30 Profi with R\/L rotation is the correct choice: significant threading capacity with MT 3 taper, 2-stage motor for variable torque on threads of different diameters. Specific oil for steel threading (e.g., CutCool, Tapping Fluid) is recommended for thread quality and tap life. For frequent M16-M20 threads, the SB 30 is correctly sized.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50696640921928,"sku":"01-1170XL","price":2986.66,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_a_colonna_Bernardo_SB_30_Profi_con_display_digitale.png?v=1758012503"},{"product_id":"bernardo-trapani-sbm-20-vario-230v","title":"Bernardo Pillar Drill SBM 20 Vario \/ 230 V with Vario Speed and Laser – drilling Ø 20 mm, MT 2 taper, continuous speed 400-1,950 rpm, spindle-to-table distance 690 mm, 0.90 kW 230V motor, weight 68 kg","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SBM 20 Vario \/ 230 V pillar drill is the upgraded Vario SBM pillar model with a 20 mm drilling diameter, a 0.90 kW motor, and a 305×305 table. It has a drilling capacity in steel up to Ø 20 mm and a continuously adjustable spindle speed from 400-1,950 rpm. Technical specifications include a MT 2 Morse taper spindle, a maximum spindle-to-table distance of 690 mm, and a spindle-to-base distance of 1,170 mm (significantly higher than BM Vario bench drills). It features an integrated digital display for speed and spindle travel, a cross-line laser device for hole centering, and a 305 × 305 mm cast iron table with 16 mm T-slots, inclinable from -45° to +45°, and height-adjustable with a rack. The cast iron base has polished T-slots, and a 1-16 mm keyless chuck with a B18 taper shank is included. The IP 54 compliant aluminum motor is 0.90 kW (S1) \/ 1.3 kW (S6) at 230V, with a spindle travel of 80 mm and a weight of 68 kg. Distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDrilling capacity in steel:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 20 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eChuck:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1-16 mm \/ B 18\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMorse taper mount:\u003c\/strong\u003e MT 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e continuous 400-1,950 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle travel:\u003c\/strong\u003e 80 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTable:\u003c\/strong\u003e 305 × 305 mm with 16 mm T-slots inclinable ±45°\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax. spindle-to-table distance:\u003c\/strong\u003e 690 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle-to-base distance:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,170 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColumn diameter:\u003c\/strong\u003e 72 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDigital display:\u003c\/strong\u003e speed + spindle travel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCross-line laser device:\u003c\/strong\u003e for hole centering\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.90 kW (S1) \/ 1.3 kW (S6) at 230V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 68 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SBM 20 Vario \/ 230 V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SBM 20 Vario \/ 230 V is a medium-sized pillar drill with continuously adjustable speed, dimensioned for professional workshops requiring drilling on tall or bulky workpieces. Key design feature: the maximum spindle-to-table distance of 690 mm and spindle-to-base distance of 1,170 mm are significantly higher than BM Vario bench drills (440 \/ 630 mm respectively): the SBM is dimensioned for workpieces up to 690 mm tall placed on the table, or workpieces up to 1,170 mm placed directly on the base. Continuously adjustable speed from 400-1,950 rpm: for applications with variable diameter tools, the Vario system is functionally superior to stepped systems. The digital display for speed and spindle travel + cross-line laser device for centering are included as standard, just like in BM Vario models. The SBM is preferable to the BM Vario for: large workpieces that cannot be placed on the table of a compact bench drill, applications with tall welded structures or bulky frames, drilling large diameter cylindrical workpieces that require more vertical space. Typical application sectors: metal carpentry with medium welded structures, mechanical assembly workshops with large frames, prototyping laboratories for bulky parts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo bench and pillar drill range is organized into 6 main sub-families: \u003cstrong\u003eTB\u003c\/strong\u003e (TB 14\/16\/20 T) entry-level with fixed B16 taper or MT 2 and stepped speeds; \u003cstrong\u003eBM T\u003c\/strong\u003e (BM 20\/25 T) intermediate with digital spindle travel display and stepped speeds; \u003cstrong\u003eBM Vario\u003c\/strong\u003e (BM 16\/20 Vario) intermediate with continuously adjustable speed + centering laser; \u003cstrong\u003eSBM Vario\u003c\/strong\u003e (SBM 16\/20 Vario) pillar drill with greater height than BM Vario; \u003cstrong\u003eB 430 Vario\u003c\/strong\u003e medium-heavy pillar drill with 360° swiveling table and MT 3 spindle; \u003cstrong\u003eSB 30 Profi\u003c\/strong\u003e heavy-duty pillar drill with 2-stage power motor, Ø 32 mm capacity. The SBM 20 Vario \/ 230 V is the SBM Vario model with identical features to the BM Vario but a pillar structure with greater height: max spindle-to-table distance of 690 mm vs 440 mm for the BM Vario, spindle-to-base distance of 1,170 mm vs 630 mm. For tall workpieces that cannot be placed on the BM Vario table, the SBM is the correct choice. For standard workpieces (height below 440 mm), the BM Vario is economically preferable (weight 46-57 kg vs 57-68 kg for the SBM). For higher capacities (Ø 25 mm), the B 430 Vario or SB 30 Profi models from the heavy-duty pillar range are correctly dimensioned.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). Manageable weight for two people with care. HSS drill bits, milling chucks, tapping devices, LED lamps, original Bernardo spare parts (belts, motors, keyless chucks, taper shanks, T-nuts) available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the SBM 20 Vario \/ 230 V is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop with drilling on tall workpieces up to 690 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-to-table distance 690 mm and spindle-to-base 1,170 mm: larger dimensions than BM Vario bench drills (440\/630 mm).\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePrecision workshop with adjustable speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVario speed 400-1,950 rpm, digital display for speed + spindle travel, centering laser included.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop with standard workpieces below 440 mm height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor standard workpieces, the corresponding BM Vario is economically preferable with similar performance and a more compact structure.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e drilling diameters greater than Ø 20 mm (for Ø 25 mm, B 430 Vario is needed; for Ø 32 mm, SB 30 Profi); heavy industrial applications requiring higher stability (KBM fixed column models are needed).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity in steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChuck\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1-16 mm \/ B 18\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMorse taper mount\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeed and travel\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed (continuous)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400-1,950 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and working dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 × 305 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable T-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e-45° to +45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-to-column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. spindle-to-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e690 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-to-base distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,170 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e72 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBase plate surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e205 × 205 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 100%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.90 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 40%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.3 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProtection standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIP 54\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e420 × 600 × 1,560 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e68 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo SBM 20 Vario \/ 230 V drill\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKeyless chuck 1-16 mm \/ B 18\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTaper shank MT 2 \/ B 18\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital display: speed + spindle travel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCross-line laser device for centering\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSet of T-nuts for workpiece clamping\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeight-adjustable guard with microswitch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSeparate emergency stop switch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSet of wrenches and service tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser manual in Italian\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between SBM Vario and BM Vario?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SBM has a spindle-to-table distance of 690 mm and a spindle-to-base distance of 1,170 mm, vs 440\/630 mm for the BM Vario. For tall workpieces that cannot be placed on the BM Vario table, the SBM is the correct choice. Same electronics (Vario display, centering laser).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SBM is structured as a pillar drill (tall vertical structure) vs the BM bench drill (compact structure). Other technical specifications (drilling capacity, motor, chuck, table) are comparable between models of the same capacity. For workshops with predominantly drilling on standard workpieces below 440 mm, the BM Vario is economically preferable (weight 46-57 kg vs 57-68 kg, lower price). For workshops with tall workpieces, the SBM is correctly dimensioned.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the pillar structure more stable than the bench drill?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, marginally. The Ø 72 mm vertical column and 57-68 kg weight offer slightly greater stability than the BM bench drill (weight 46-57 kg). For heavy drilling applications (Ø 18-20 mm on steel), the superior stability reduces spindle vibrations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor standard applications (drilling Ø below 12 mm on mild steel), the difference in stability is marginal. For heavy industrial applications requiring higher stability, the B 430 Vario (Ø 80 mm column, 100 kg weight) or SB 30 Profi (Ø 100 mm column, 245 kg weight) models are correctly dimensioned. For series production with heavy workpieces, structural stability is a crucial characteristic for hole quality and tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eDoes the Vario system require special maintenance?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, periodic. The electronic variator requires an annual check of contacts, and the variable diameter pulleys (Reeves system) require lubrication of the opening mechanism every 500 operating hours. Typical Vario belt replacement every 2-4 years in normal use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLubrication procedure: open the transmission cover, apply specific lithium grease for pulleys to the opening\/closing mechanisms of the pulleys, manually turn the speed adjustment knob to distribute the grease. Vario belts are of a special type (wider and more flexible than standard belts) to allow for variable diameter: original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eCan I use the SBM Vario for tapping?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly if it has R\/L rotation (some models). The SBM 20 Vario 400V has dedicated right\/left rotation; the standard SBM 16 Vario does not. For tapping with a tap, R\/L rotation is necessary for automatic ejection of the tap from the hole.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor occasional tapping on SBM Vario without R\/L, hand taps can be used (they only require guidance from a stationary spindle): less precise but sufficient for intermittent applications. For precision tapping on steel, R\/L rotation is a crucial characteristic: manual rotation of a stationary spindle causes uneven tap torsion (risk of thread breakage). For frequent M taps, the SB 30 Profi is correctly dimensioned with R\/L rotation and higher capacity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eDoes the SBM have a 360° swiveling table?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The SBM table is only inclinable ±45° (like BM\/TB). For a 360° swiveling table around the column, the B 430 Vario is correctly dimensioned.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 360° swiveling table allows positioning the workpiece at any angle: a crucial characteristic for angled drilling on cylindrical workpieces, radial holes on flanges, prototyping operations with non-standard angles. For standard applications with vertical or angled ±45° holes, inclinable tables are sufficient. For applications with complex angles, the B 430 Vario is the correct choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50696658026824,"sku":"01-1130","price":774.11,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_a_colonna_Bernardo_SBM_20_Vario_230_V_con_display_digitale.jpg?v=1758011089"},{"product_id":"bernardo-trapani-sbm-20-vario-400v","title":"Bernardo Pillar Drill SBM 20 Vario \/ 400 V with Vario Speed and Laser – drilling Ø 20 mm, MT 2 taper, continuous speed 400-1,950 rpm, spindle-to-table distance 690 mm, 0.90 kW 400V three-phase motor, R\/L rotation, weight 68 kg","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SBM 20 Vario \/ 400 V pillar drill is the SBM 20 Vario pillar model with a 0.90 kW three-phase motor and right\/left rotation for tapping, with a drilling capacity in steel up to Ø 20 mm and a continuously adjustable spindle speed from 400-1,950 rpm. Technical features: Morse taper MT 2, max spindle-to-table distance 690 mm and spindle-to-base distance 1,170 mm (significantly higher than BM Vario bench drills), integrated digital speed and spindle travel display, cross-laser device for hole centering, 305 × 305 mm cast iron table with 16 mm T-slots inclinable from -45° to +45° height-adjustable with rack, polished cast iron base with T-slots, 1-16 mm keyless chuck with B18 shank included. IP 54 compliant aluminum motor: 0.90 kW (S1) \/ 1.3 kW (S6) at 400V three-phase, spindle travel 80 mm, weight 68 kg. Right\/left spindle rotation for tapping. Distributed in Italy by Krollit as official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDrilling capacity in steel:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 20 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eChuck:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1-16 mm \/ B 18\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMorse taper mount:\u003c\/strong\u003e MT 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e continuous 400-1,950 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle travel:\u003c\/strong\u003e 80 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTable:\u003c\/strong\u003e 305 × 305 mm with 16 mm T-slots inclinable ±45°\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax spindle-to-table distance:\u003c\/strong\u003e 690 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle-to-base distance:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,170 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColumn diameter:\u003c\/strong\u003e 72 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDigital display:\u003c\/strong\u003e speed + spindle travel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCross-laser device:\u003c\/strong\u003e for hole centering\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRight\/left rotation:\u003c\/strong\u003e for tapping\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.90 kW (S1) \/ 1.3 kW (S6) at 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 68 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SBM 20 Vario \/ 400 V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SBM 20 Vario \/ 400 V is a medium-sized pillar drill with continuously adjustable speed, sized for professional workshops requiring drilling on tall or bulky workpieces. Key design feature: the max spindle-to-table distance of 690 mm and spindle-to-base distance of 1,170 mm are significantly higher than BM Vario bench drills (440 \/ 630 mm respectively): the SBM is sized for workpieces up to 690 mm tall placed on the table, or workpieces up to 1,170 mm placed directly on the base. Continuously adjustable speed from 400-1,950 rpm: for applications with varying tool diameters, the Vario system is functionally superior to stepped systems. The digital speed and spindle travel display + cross-laser device for centering are included as standard, as in BM Vario models. The SBM is preferable to the BM Vario for: large workpieces that cannot be placed on the table of a compact bench drill, applications with tall welded structures or bulky frames, drilling large diameter cylindrical workpieces that require greater vertical space. Typical application sectors: metal carpentry with medium welded structures, mechanical assembly workshops with large frames, prototyping laboratories for bulky parts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo bench and pillar drill range is organized into 6 main sub-families: \u003cstrong\u003eTB\u003c\/strong\u003e (TB 14\/16\/20 T) entry-level with fixed B16 or MT 2 taper and stepped speeds; \u003cstrong\u003eBM T\u003c\/strong\u003e (BM 20\/25 T) intermediate with digital spindle travel display and stepped speeds; \u003cstrong\u003eBM Vario\u003c\/strong\u003e (BM 16\/20 Vario) intermediate with continuously adjustable speed + centering laser; \u003cstrong\u003eSBM Vario\u003c\/strong\u003e (SBM 16\/20 Vario) pillar drill with greater height than BM Vario; \u003cstrong\u003eB 430 Vario\u003c\/strong\u003e medium-heavy pillar drill with 360° swivel table and MT 3 spindle; \u003cstrong\u003eSB 30 Profi\u003c\/strong\u003e heavy-duty pillar drill with 2-stage power motor, Ø 32 mm capacity. The SBM 20 Vario \/ 400 V is the SBM Vario model with identical features to the BM Vario but a pillar structure with greater height: max spindle-to-table distance 690 mm vs 440 mm for the BM Vario, spindle-to-base distance 1,170 mm vs 630 mm. For tall workpieces that cannot be placed on the BM Vario table, the SBM is the correct choice. For standard workpieces (height below 440 mm) the BM Vario is economically preferable (weight 46-57 kg vs 57-68 kg for the SBM). For higher capacities (Ø 25 mm), the B 430 Vario or SB 30 Profi models from the heavy-duty pillar range are correctly sized.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). Manageable weight with two people with care. HSS drill bits, milling chucks, tapping devices, LED lamps, original Bernardo spare parts (belts, motors, keyless chucks, taper shafts, T-nuts) available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the SBM 20 Vario \/ 400 V is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop with drilling on workpieces up to 690 mm high\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-to-table distance 690 mm and spindle-to-base 1,170 mm: dimensions superior to BM Vario bench drills (440\/630 mm).\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePrecision workshop with adjustable speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVario speed 400-1,950 rpm, digital speed + spindle travel display, centering laser included.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop with frequent M threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDedicated right\/left rotation for tapping.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop with standard workpieces under 440 mm high\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor standard workpieces, the corresponding BM Vario is economically preferable with similar performance and a more compact structure.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e drilling diameters exceeding Ø 20 mm (for Ø 25 mm, B 430 Vario is needed; for Ø 32 mm, SB 30 Profi); heavy industrial applications requiring superior stability (fixed column KBM models are needed).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity in steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChuck\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1-16 mm \/ B 18\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMorse taper mount\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeed and Stroke\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed (continuous)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400-1,950 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and Working Dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 × 305 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable T-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e-45° to +45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-to-column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax spindle-to-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e690 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-to-base distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,170 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e72 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBase plate surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e205 × 205 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and Power Supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 100%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.90 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 40%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.3 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V three-phase \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProtection standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIP 54\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and Weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e420 × 600 × 1,560 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e68 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard Equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo SBM 20 Vario \/ 400 V drill\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKeyless chuck 1-16 mm \/ B 18\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTaper shank MT 2 \/ B 18\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital display: speed + spindle travel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCross-laser device for centering\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRight\/left spindle rotation function\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSet of T-nuts for workpiece clamping\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeight-adjustable guard with microswitch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSeparate emergency stop switch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSet of wrenches and service tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser manual in Italian\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between SBM Vario and BM Vario?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SBM has a spindle-to-table distance of 690 mm and a spindle-to-base distance of 1,170 mm, vs 440\/630 mm for the BM Vario. For tall workpieces that cannot be placed on the BM Vario table, the SBM is the correct choice. Same electronics (Vario display, centering laser).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SBM is structured as a pillar drill (tall vertical structure) vs the BM as a bench drill (compact structure). Other technical specifications (drilling capacity, motor, chuck, table) are comparable between models of similar capacity. For workshops primarily drilling standard workpieces under 440 mm, the BM Vario is economically preferable (weight 46-57 kg vs 57-68 kg, lower price). For workshops with tall workpieces, the SBM is correctly sized.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the pillar structure more stable than the bench drill?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, marginally. The vertical column Ø 72 mm and weight 57-68 kg offer slightly superior stability to the BM bench drill (weight 46-57 kg). For applications with heavy drilling (Ø 18-20 mm on steel) superior stability reduces spindle vibrations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor standard applications (drilling Ø under 12 mm on mild steels) the difference in stability is marginal. For heavy industrial applications requiring superior stability, the B 430 Vario (column Ø 80 mm, weight 100 kg) or SB 30 Profi (column Ø 100 mm, weight 245 kg) models are correctly sized. For series production with heavy workpieces, structural stability is a determining characteristic for hole quality and tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eDoes the Vario system require special maintenance?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, periodic. The electronic variator requires annual contact verification, the variable diameter pulleys (Reeves system) require lubrication of the opening mechanism every 500 hours of operation. Typical Vario belt replacement every 2-4 years in normal use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLubrication procedure: open the transmission cover, apply specific lithium grease for pulleys to the opening\/closing mechanisms of the pulleys, manually rotate the speed adjustment knob to distribute the grease. Vario belts are special (wider and more flexible than standard belts) to allow variable diameter: original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eCan I use the SBM Vario for tapping?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly if it has R\/L rotation (some models). The SBM 20 Vario 400V has dedicated right\/left rotation; the standard SBM 16 Vario does not. For tapping with a tap, R\/L rotation is necessary for automatic ejection of the tap from the hole.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor occasional tapping on SBM Vario without R\/L, it is possible to use hand taps (only require stationary spindle guidance): less precise but sufficient for occasional applications. For precision tapping on steel, R\/L rotation is a determining characteristic: manual rotation of the stationary spindle causes uneven tap torsion (risk of thread breakage). For frequent M threads, the SB 30 Profi is correctly sized with R\/L rotation and superior capacity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eDoes the SBM have a 360° swivel table?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The SBM table can only be tilted ±45° (like BM\/TB). For a 360° swivel table around the column, the B 430 Vario is correctly sized.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 360° swivel table allows workpiece positioning at any angle: a determining feature for angled drilling on cylindrical workpieces, radial holes on flanges, prototyping operations with non-standard angles. For standard applications with vertical or ±45° angled holes, only tiltable tables are sufficient. For applications with complex angles, the B 430 Vario is the correct choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50696665301320,"sku":"01-1131","price":785.09,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_a_colonna_Bernardo_SBM_20_Vario_400_V_con_display_digitale.jpg?v=1758010362"},{"product_id":"bernardo-trapani-tb-16t-230v","title":"Bernardo TB 16 T \/ 230 V Entry Level Bench Drill – drilling Ø 16 mm, MT 2 taper, 12 speeds 300-2,550 rpm, 0.55 kW 230V motor, weight 36 kg","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo TB 16 T \/ 230 V bench drill is the entry-level model in the TB range with a drilling capacity of Ø 16 mm and MT 2 taper, capable of drilling in steel up to Ø 16 mm. Technical specifications: MT 2 Morse taper spindle, 1-16 mm \/ B 16 keyless chuck, 12 spindle speeds 300-2,550 rpm with belt drive, 245 × 245 mm cast iron table with 16 mm T-slots, inclinable from -45° to +45° and height-adjustable with rack and pinion, base treated with T-slots for clamping large workpieces, Ø 58 mm column. IP 54 compliant aluminum motor: 0.55 kW (S1) \/ 0.80 kW (S6) at 230V, spindle stroke 65 mm, weight 36 kg. Distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDrilling capacity in steel:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 16 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eChuck:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1-16 mm \/ B 16\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMorse taper mount:\u003c\/strong\u003e MT 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle speeds:\u003c\/strong\u003e 12 speeds 300-2,550 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle stroke:\u003c\/strong\u003e 65 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTable:\u003c\/strong\u003e 245 × 245 mm with 16 mm T-slots, inclinable ±45°\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax. spindle to table distance:\u003c\/strong\u003e 445 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle to base distance:\u003c\/strong\u003e 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColumn diameter:\u003c\/strong\u003e 58 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.55 kW (S1) \/ 0.80 kW (S6) at 230V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 36 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TB 16 T \/ 230 V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo TB 16 T \/ 230 V is a compact bench drill from the TB range (professional entry-level), sized for craft workshops, advanced hobbyists, and small laboratories needing precision drilling in steel up to Ø 16 mm. Key design feature: the TB model is the simplified version of the BM range, with a significantly lower price while maintaining Bernardo's build quality. Differences compared to the corresponding BM: no digital display, standard belt drive without additional components, simplified ergonomics. The 12 step speeds of 300-2,550 rpm allow adaptation to standard materials. The IP 54 compliant aluminum motor (0.55 kW S1 \/ 0.80 kW S6) at 230V provides the necessary power for normal daily use. The 245 × 245 mm cast iron table, inclinable ±45° with T-slots, allows for angled drilling. Typical areas of use: metal hobbyists with standard precision needs, craft workshops with occasional use, model makers for building small frames and mechanisms, basic educational laboratories for technical schools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo range of bench and pillar drills is organized into 6 main sub-families: \u003cstrong\u003eTB\u003c\/strong\u003e (TB 14\/16\/20 T) entry-level with fixed B16 or MT 2 taper and step speeds; \u003cstrong\u003eBM T\u003c\/strong\u003e (BM 20\/25 T) intermediate with digital spindle stroke display and step speeds; \u003cstrong\u003eBM Vario\u003c\/strong\u003e (BM 16\/20 Vario) intermediate with continuously adjustable speed + centering laser; \u003cstrong\u003eSBM Vario\u003c\/strong\u003e (SBM 16\/20 Vario) pillar drill with greater height than BM Vario; \u003cstrong\u003eB 430 Vario\u003c\/strong\u003e medium-heavy pillar drill with 360° swiveling table and MT 3 spindle; \u003cstrong\u003eSB 30 Profi\u003c\/strong\u003e heavy-duty pillar drill with 2-stage power motor, Ø 32 mm capacity. The TB 16 T \/ 230 V is the entry-level model in the Bernardo bench drill range. Features: standard MT 2 taper, 1-16 mm keyless chuck with B16, step speeds. For daily use without the need for a digital display, the TB is economically preferable to the corresponding BM. For digital spindle stroke display requirements, the corresponding BM is correctly sized.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). Weight manageable by one person or two with controlled lifting. HSS drill bits, milling chucks, tapping devices, LED lamps, original Bernardo spare parts (belts, motors, keyless chucks, taper shafts, T-nuts) available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the TB 16 T \/ 230 V is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetal hobbyist with occasional use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompact machine at an affordable price, standard Bernardo construction, sufficient capacity for hobby applications.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCraft workshop for non-daily use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 16 mm capacity covers most occasional applications. 36 kg weight manageable in a compact workshop.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop with digital display or higher precision needs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor digital spindle stroke display, the corresponding BM is correctly sized. The TB is economical but without advanced features.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e drilling diameters larger than Ø 16 mm; daily professional use with higher precision requirements (BM\/SBM\/B 430 are correctly sized); applications requiring digital display or continuous speed adjustment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity in steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 16 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChuck\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1-16 mm \/ B 16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMorse taper mount\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeed and Stroke\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 speeds 300-2,550 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e65 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and Working Dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e245 × 245 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable T-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e-45° to +45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle to column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e155 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. spindle to table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e445 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle to base distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e58 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBase surface area\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e185 × 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and Power Supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 100%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.55 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 40%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.80 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProtection standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIP 54\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and Weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 × 570 × 920 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e36 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/CE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard Equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo TB 16 T \/ 230 V Drill\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1-16 mm \/ B 16 keyless chuck\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMT 2 \/ B 16 taper arbor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSet of T-nuts for workpiece clamping\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeight-adjustable guard with microswitch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSeparate emergency stop switch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSet of wrenches and service tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser manual in Italian\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between the TB and the corresponding BM?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TB is the entry-level version: no digital display, simplified ergonomics, significantly lower price than the corresponding BM.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor occasional hobby use or craft workshops without higher precision needs, the TB is economically preferable. For daily professional use with digital spindle stroke display requirements, the corresponding BM is correctly sized. The basic construction quality (cast iron frame, bearings, IP 54 motor) is the same for both lines: the TB only eliminates advanced features (display, laser, ergonomics).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the nominal drilling capacity realistic?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, for soft and standard steels. The Ø 16 mm capacity is sized for structural steels (S235, S275, S355) and soft engineering steels (C45, 11SMnPb30): for these materials, the machine can perform drilling at the nominal diameter with adequate quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor hard alloy steels (42CrMo4, 39NiCrMo3), the effective capacity is reduced by 20-30%: for the TB 16, the actual capacity on hard steels is Ø 11 mm. For stainless steels (304, 316), the rotational speed must be reduced to 60-70% of the standard value to avoid work hardening of the material and degradation of the cutting edge. For applications with tough materials, the BM\/SBM models with higher S1 motor power are correctly sized.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eAre the step speeds sufficient for standard use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The 12 step speeds of 300-2,550 rpm cover standard materials: hard steels 220-500 rpm, soft steels 1,000-1,500 rpm, aluminum and brass 1,500-2,840 rpm. For each tool and material, there is an adequate step speed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSpeed change: open the transmission cover, move the belt to different pulleys, close the cover. Typical time: 30-60 seconds. For workshops with frequent speed changes (more than 5 changes\/hour), the Vario system is preferable to reduce time. For workshops predominantly using a standard material, step speeds are completely adequate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eCan I tap with the TB?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly with hand taps: the standard TB does not have dedicated R\/L rotation. For precision tapping with a mechanical tap, the BM 25 T 400V or SB 30 Profi are correctly sized.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTapping with a hand tap (no machine rotation): the operator mounts the tap in the chuck, aligns it with the hole, manually rotates it with a tapping wrench. This procedure is suitable for occasional tapping on soft steels, M under M10. For precision tapping, M above M10, or frequent tapping, mechanical R\/L rotation is a crucial feature.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the TB truly professional or just for hobbies?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional entry-level. The TB is manufactured according to the same construction standards as the BM\/SBM Bernardo range (cast iron frame, IP 54 motor, quality bearings) but with simplified features to reduce the price.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor craft workshops with standard daily use, the TB is completely adequate: the hole quality and machine durability are comparable to the corresponding BM. The differences (no digital display, basic ergonomics, step speeds) impact work efficiency but not the technical quality of drilling. For advanced hobby use, the TB is the correct choice in terms of quality\/price ratio. For intensive professional use with efficiency requirements, the BM Vario or SBM Vario are correctly sized.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50696684896584,"sku":"01-1031","price":434.33,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_da_banco_Bernardo_TB_16_T_230_V_compatto_e_versatile.jpg?v=1758009588"},{"product_id":"bernardo-bf-25-super-trapano-fresatrice","title":"Bernardo BF 25 Super Drill-Milling Machine with Vario Speed 100-1,750 rpm and M12 Thread","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo BF 25 Super is a professional 165 kg drill-milling machine for workshops and mechanical laboratories, with Ø25 mm steel drilling capacity, Ø63 mm face milling capacity, Vario speed 100–1,750 rpm, 1.3 kW motor, MT 3 spindle taper. Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSteel drilling Ø25 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. face milling Ø63 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. end milling Ø25 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThreading up to M12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle speed 100–1,750 rpm (Vario)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle taper MT 3, stroke 70 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCross table 550 x 160 mm, X\/Y travel 400 \/ 140 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor 1.0 kW (S1) \/ 1.3 kW (S6) 230 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight 165 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the BF 25 Super and what for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSmall-scale mechanical workshops, maintenance technicians, and prototyping laboratories use this drill-milling machine for intermediate operations: drilling up to Ø25 mm in steel, face milling up to Ø63 mm, slotting on the table, angular drilling thanks to the 90° R \/ 30° L tilting head. The Vario speed of 100–1,750 rpm allows it to adapt to different materials, from soft steels to light alloys.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo BF 25 Super is positioned in the mid-range of Bernardo drill-milling machines. Above this machine, the range offers the BF 28 BDC and BF 30 G models with greater drilling capacity (25 mm vs. 28-30 mm) and the large BF 45 HSV \/ FM 45 HSV \/ FM 50 HSV with structures weighing 308-362 kg for industrial use. Below the BF 25 Super, the range offers the KF 10 bench series for model making and laboratories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For original Bernardo spare parts, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the BF 25 Super for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall and medium mechanical workshops\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling Ø25 mm, milling Ø63 mm, Vario speed 100–1,750 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial maintenance and repair shops\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable 550 x 160 mm with X\/Y travel 400 \/ 140 mm; tilting head 90° R \/ 30° L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduction in hard, high-strength steels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTo be evaluated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.3 kW 230 V motor suitable for mild steels and light alloys; for alloyed steels, consider large HSVs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e continuous production on hardened steels, heavy mold machining, multi-shift industrial cycles (for these uses, consider BF 45 HSV or FM 45\/50 HSV).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMachining capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel drilling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. face milling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ63 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. end milling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. threading\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed (Vario)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100–1,750 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRight\/left rotation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes, standard for threading\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and head\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e550 x 160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable travel (X \/ Y)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 \/ 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHead tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° R \/ 30° L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHead height adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e390 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25–415 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 100%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.0 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 40%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.3 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 x 670 x 980 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e165 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eChuck 3-16 mm \/ B16\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle arbor MT 3 \/ B16\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrawbar M12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital speed indicator\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital spindle stroke indicator\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated threading device\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeight-adjustable guard with microswitch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTool set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the drilling and milling capacities of the BF 25 Super?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel drilling up to Ø25 mm, face milling up to Ø63 mm, end milling up to Ø25 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated capacities refer to standard unhardened steels (e.g., C40, S235). On harder materials or alloyed steels, the actual capacity may be lower: in this case, it is advisable to reduce the rotation speed and feed rate to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted on the BF 25 Super?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine has a continuously adjustable Vario speed in the range 100–1,750 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Vario adjustment allows for fine tuning of the speed to the material and tool diameter, without having to change belts or gears. For face milling of mild steels, you typically work in the low range, while for small diameter holes in aluminum, the high range is used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply and motor does the BF 25 Super use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e1.0 kW (S1 continuous) \/ 1.3 kW (S6 intermittent) motor with 230 V power supply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe motor operates with standard 230 V single-phase power, available in all workshop and laboratory environments. The S6 40% rating indicates that the motor can deliver maximum power for intermittent cycles, while the S1 100% rating indicates the nominal power for continuous use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the table dimensions, travel, and spindle taper of the BF 25 Super?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCross table 550 x 160 mm with X\/Y travel of 400 \/ 140 mm, MT 3 spindle taper, 70 mm spindle stroke.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe MT 3 spindle taper is an international standard: accessories (self-tightening chucks, milling chucks, reduction arbors) are commonly available. The table travels allow for machining parts within the effective usable dimensions (X\/Y travels net of clamping obstructions).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the BF 25 Super weigh and what type of installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine weighs approximately 165 kg and is designed for installation on a rigid base (optional accessory) or a robust workbench, with a 230 V electrical connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor transporting and positioning a 165 kg machine, the use of a pallet truck or light crane is recommended. The support bench must be sized for the weight of the machine plus the workpiece being machined, ensuring flatness to avoid compromising precision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50696733851976,"sku":"02-1040","price":2481.57,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_BF_25_Super_Trapano-fresatrice_compatta_con_regolazione_elettronica_continua.png?v=1757668708"},{"product_id":"bernardo-bf-30-g-trapano-fresatrice","title":"Bernardo BF 30 G drill-milling machine, mechanical gear, 12 speeds 95-2,840 rpm, drilling Ø30 mm","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo BF 30 G is a professional drilling and milling machine with a 12-speed mechanical gearbox (95–2,840 rpm) for workshops with continuous use, steel drilling Ø30 mm, face milling Ø63 mm, 1.1 \/ 1.6 kW 400 V motor, 700 x 190 mm cast iron table, 190 kg weight. Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSteel drilling Ø30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax face milling Ø63 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax end milling Ø25 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle speed 95–2,840 rpm (12 speeds)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle taper MT 3, travel 70 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCross table 700 x 190 mm, X\/Y travel 375 \/ 230 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor 0.75 \/ 1.1 kW (S1) \/ 1.1 \/ 1.6 kW (S6) 400 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight 190 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the BF 30 G and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProduction mechanical workshops, industrial maintenance personnel, and laboratories requiring a 12-speed mechanical gearbox for intensive use choose this drilling and milling machine for series production: drilling up to Ø30 mm, face milling up to Ø63 mm, and making keyways on the 700 x 190 mm cast iron table. The 2-stage 400 V 1.1 \/ 1.6 kW motor supports continuous work cycles without torque degradation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo BF 30 G is positioned as a model with a mechanical gearbox in the mid-to-high range of Bernardo drilling and milling machines. Above this machine, the range offers HSV models (BF 45, FM 45, FM 50) with structures weighing 308-362 kg, drilling up to Ø32 mm and face milling up to Ø80 mm. Below the BF 30 G, the range offers the BF 28 BDC series with electronic Vario speed and a drilling capacity of Ø28 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics and Krollit support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For original Bernardo spare parts, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the BF 30 G for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall series production mechanical workshops\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-speed mechanical gearbox (95–2,840 rpm), 1.1 \/ 1.6 kW 400 V motor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial maintenance personnel in multi-shift environments\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e700 x 190 mm cast iron table, 190 kg structure, drilling Ø30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLaboratories requiring fine electronic speed adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot indicated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStepped mechanical gearbox (not Vario): for continuous adjustment, consider the BF 28 BDC or HSV Vario series\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e operations requiring continuous Vario speed, heavy mold making, precision milling (for these uses, consider BF 45 HSV Vario or FM 45\/50 HSV).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel drilling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax face milling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ63 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax end milling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed (12 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e95–2,840 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClockwise\/counter-clockwise rotation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes, standard for threading\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and head\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e700 x 190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable travel (X \/ Y)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e375 \/ 230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHead tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e±45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHead height adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e360 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e170 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e105–465 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 100%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.75 \/ 1.1 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 40%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.1 \/ 1.6 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,000 x 720 x 1,300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e190 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrill chuck 3-16 mm \/ B16\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle arbor MT 3 \/ B16\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrawbar M12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital speed indicator\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital spindle travel indicator\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated threading device\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeight-adjustable guard with microswitch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTool set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the drilling and milling capacities of the BF 30 G?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel drilling up to Ø30 mm, face milling up to Ø63 mm, end milling up to Ø25 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated capacities refer to standard unhardened steels (e.g., C40, S235). For harder materials or alloyed steels, the actual capacity may be lower: in this case, it is advisable to reduce the rotation speed and feed rate to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted on the BF 30 G?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine features a 12-speed mechanical gearbox in the range of 95–2,840 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 2-stage 12-speed mechanical gearbox is designed to sustain continuous workshop operations without torque degradation, unlike electronic Vario systems. Speed selection is done via levers on the side of the head.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply and motor does the BF 30 G have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e0.75 \/ 1.1 kW (S1 continuous) \/ 1.1 \/ 1.6 kW (S6 intermittent) motor with 400 V power supply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe motor requires a 400 V three-phase power supply. Verify the presence of a three-phase line in the workshop before purchasing. For environments without three-phase power, the Bernardo range offers equivalent 230 V single-phase models, but with lower processing capacities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the table dimensions, travel, and spindle taper of the BF 30 G?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCross table 700 x 190 mm with X\/Y travel of 375 \/ 230 mm, MT 3 spindle taper, 70 mm spindle travel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe MT 3 spindle taper is an international standard: accessories (self-tightening chucks, milling chucks, reduction arbors) are commonly available. The table travels allow working on pieces that fit within the actual useful dimensions (X\/Y travels net of clamping obstructions).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the BF 30 G weigh and what type of installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine weighs approximately 190 kg and is designed for installation on a rigid base (optional) or a sturdy workbench, with a 400 V electrical connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor transporting and positioning a 190 kg machine, the use of a pallet truck or light crane is recommended. The support bench must be sized for the weight of the machine plus the workpiece being processed, ensuring flatness to avoid compromising precision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50696741093704,"sku":"02-1037","price":2525.49,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_BF_30_G_Trapano-fresatrice_versatile_con_cambio_a_12_velocit.png?v=1757666383"},{"product_id":"bernardo-bf-25-l-super-trapano-fresatrice","title":"Bernardo Drill-Milling Machine BF 25 L Super","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo BF 25 L Super Mill Drill – Precise and Versatile\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo BF 25 L Super mill drill is a machine designed for precision work in workshops and laboratories. Thanks to its DC motor with continuous speed adjustment (100–1750 rpm), it guarantees optimal torque even at low speeds and maximum adaptability to various machining requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe head can be tilted 90° to the right and 30° to the left for angular machining, while the 700 x 160 mm cross table with travels of 550 x 140 mm offers ample working space. Dovetail guides on the X, Y, and Z axes, adjustable via gibs, and digital indicators for speed and spindle travel ensure stability and precision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEquipped with right\/left rotation for tapping, height-adjustable protection, and compact construction, the BF 25 L Super is a reliable and affordable solution for drilling, milling, and boring.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eMain Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003e Drilling capacity up to Ø 25 mm in steel\u003cbr\u003e Max. face milling 63 mm and end milling 25 mm\u003cbr\u003e Tapping up to M12 with integrated right\/left rotation\u003cbr\u003e DC motor with continuously variable speed (100–1750 rpm)\u003cbr\u003e Tilting head 90° right and 30° left for angular machining\u003cbr\u003e 700 x 160 mm cross table with 550 x 140 mm travels\u003cbr\u003e Digital speed and spindle travel indicator included as standard\u003cbr\u003e Dovetail guides on X, Y, and Z adjustable with gibs\u003cbr\u003e Head height adjustment via front handwheel\u003cbr\u003e Compact and robust structure to reduce vibrations\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical table:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFace milling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e63 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd milling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. tapping capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle to column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle to table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 – 415 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed (variable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 – 1750 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e700 x 160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable travels (X \/ Y)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e550 \/ 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHead tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° R \/ 30° L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHead height adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e390 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slot dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 100%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.0 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 40%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.3 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)*\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 x 670 x 980 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 200 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e*without stand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePackage contents:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e Chuck 1–13 mm \/ B16\u003cbr\u003e Spindle arbor MT 3 \/ B16\u003cbr\u003e Drawbar M12\u003cbr\u003e Digital speed indicator\u003cbr\u003e Digital spindle travel indicator\u003cbr\u003e Height-adjustable guard\u003cbr\u003e Tool set\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between the KF series and the BF\/FM series in the Bernardo range?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe KF series (KF 16, KF 20, KF 25, KF 28) is the compact range: smaller tables, MT2\/MT3 tapers, suitable for workshops with limited space and small-to-medium sized workpieces. The BF series (BF 25, BF 30, BF 35, BF 40, BF 45) and FM series (FM 40, FM 45, FM 50, FM 55) are the professional versions: larger tables, MT3\/MT4 tapers, more powerful motors, longer travels — for medium-sized workpieces in continuous production. The FM series has a 360° tilting head which the KF does not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat do the suffixes \"Vario\" and \"HSV\" mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario: continuously adjustable spindle speed without changing belts. HSV: spindle head with tilt from −90° to +90° (Head Swivel Variable). BDC: integrated 3-axis digital position display (Digital Readout). The combination of HSV + Vario is the most flexible configuration for workshops working on different materials and geometries.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 3-axis DRO included as standard or is it an option?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the model. Models with \"BDC\", \"DT 40\", \"ES-12V\" or \"with 3-axis display\" in the name include the digital display as standard. Models without this designation do not include it — it is available as an optional accessory. Please check the specific model description.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop for the BF\/FM series?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBF and FM milling machines are stationary workshop machines — not portable. Consider the space for the X and Y axis travels plus at least 60 cm clear space on each side for safe operation. Contact Krollit for the complete dimensions of the specific model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50696954806600,"sku":"02-1041","price":2569.41,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_BF_25_L_Super_Trapano-fresatrice_compatta_con_velocit_variabile.jpg?v=1757586068"},{"product_id":"bernardo-fm-45-hsv-trapano-fresatrice","title":"Bernardo Mill-Drill FM 45 HSV","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo Mill-Drill FM 45 HSV – Versatility and Power for Precision Machining\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo FM 45 HSV mill-drill is a robust and versatile machine, suitable for drilling, milling, and threading. Thanks to its two-speed motor (75–3200 rpm) and quick gear selector, it offers a wide range of applications with simple and fast changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe swivelling head from -60° to +60°, the 800 x 240 mm cross table with travels of 555 x 225 mm, and automatic spindle feeds allow for angular machining, chamfers, and deep drilling. The cast-iron structure minimises vibrations, while dovetail guides on the X and Y axes ensure stability and precision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe FM 45 HSV is also equipped with a threading device, digital spindle travel indicator, adjustable protection with microswitch, LED light, and professional accessories, making it a complete machine for workshops and mechanical laboratories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eMain Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003e Drilling up to Ø 32 mm in steel and max. milling 80 mm\u003cbr\u003e Two-stage motor with 12 speed ranges (75–3200 rpm)\u003cbr\u003e Swivelling head ±60° for angular machining and chamfers\u003cbr\u003e Automatic spindle feed (0.10 \/ 0.18 \/ 0.26 mm\/rev)\u003cbr\u003e Integrated threading device as standard\u003cbr\u003e Cross table 800 x 240 mm with travels 555 x 225 mm\u003cbr\u003e Heavy cast-iron structure to reduce vibrations\u003cbr\u003e Dovetail guides on X and Y axes adjustable with gibs\u003cbr\u003e Digital spindle travel indicator included\u003cbr\u003e LED work light and height-adjustable protection\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical table:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e32 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity cast iron\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. milling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed (12 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 – 3200 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle feeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.10 \/ 0.18 \/ 0.26 mm\/rev\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e800 x 240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable travels (X \/ Y)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e555 \/ 225 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHead tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e-60° to +60°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 – 485 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHead height adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e425 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slot size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e14 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 100%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.1 \/ 1.5 kW (400 V)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 40%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 \/ 2.2 kW (400 V)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)*\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1140 x 770 x 1500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 308 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e*without stand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eScope of delivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e Keyless drill chuck 3–16 mm \/ B16\u003cbr\u003e Spindle arbor MT 4 \/ B16\u003cbr\u003e Drawbar M16\u003cbr\u003e Morse taper sleeve MT 4\/3\u003cbr\u003e End mill holder MT 4\/27 mm\u003cbr\u003e Height-adjustable protection\u003cbr\u003e Automatic spindle feed\u003cbr\u003e LED work light\u003cbr\u003e Digital spindle travel indicator\u003cbr\u003e Threading device\u003cbr\u003e Steel cover\u003cbr\u003e Longitudinal ruler\u003cbr\u003e Tool set\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo Shipping: 5–9 working days (7 days to the South of Italy). Original spare parts available with 3–5 working day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between the KF series and the BF\/FM series in the Bernardo range?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe KF series (KF 16, KF 20, KF 25, KF 28) is the compact range: smaller tables, MT2\/MT3 taper, suitable for workshops with limited space and small-to-medium sized machining. The BF series (BF 25, BF 30, BF 35, BF 40, BF 45) and FM series (FM 40, FM 45, FM 50, FM 55) are the professional versions: larger tables, MT3\/MT4 taper, more powerful motors, longer travels — for medium-sized workpieces in continuous production. The FM series has a 360° swivelling head that the KF does not have.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat do the suffixes \"Vario\" and \"HSV\" mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario: continuously adjustable spindle speed without changing belts. HSV: spindle head with tilt from −90° to +90° (Head Swivel Variable). BDC: integrated 3-axis digital position display (Digital Readout). The combination of HSV + Vario is the most flexible configuration for workshops working on different materials and geometries.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 3-axis DRO included as standard or is it an option?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the model. Models with the designation \"BDC\", \"DT 40\", \"ES-12V\" or \"with 3-axis display\" in the name include the digital display as standard. Models without this designation do not include it — it is available as an optional accessory. Please check the specific model description.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 working day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop for the BF\/FM series?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBF and FM milling machines are stationary workshop machines — not portable. Consider space for the X and Y axis travels plus at least 60 cm clear space on each side for safe working. Contact Krollit for the complete dimensions of the specific model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50696987345224,"sku":"02-1087","price":3436.86,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_FM_45_HSV_Trapano-fresatrice_con_testa_inclinabile_e_avanzamento_automatico.png?v=1757579271"},{"product_id":"bernardo-kf-28-top-fresatrice-trapano","title":"Bernardo Drill-Milling Machine KF 28 Top","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo Mill Drill KF 28 Top – Compact, versatile\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo KF 28 Top mill drill is a compact and precise machine, suitable for drilling, milling, and threading operations. The 2-stage gearbox with continuously variable speed (50–2600 rpm) ensures excellent power transmission and perfect adaptation to every type of material.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 700 x 180 mm cross table with 490 x 150 mm travel and the ±90° tilting head allow for easy and precise angular machining and chamfering. The DC motor provides optimal torque even at low speeds, while the dovetail guides on X, Y, and Z axes, adjustable with gibs, guarantee stability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith speed and spindle travel digital display, adjustable protection, EMC filter, and LED light included, the KF 28 Top is the compact and efficient choice for workshops and laboratories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eMain specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003e Drilling capacity up to 25 mm in steel\u003cbr\u003e Face milling up to 63 mm and end milling up to 25 mm\u003cbr\u003e 2-stage gearbox with continuously variable speed (50–2600 rpm)\u003cbr\u003e Tilting head ±90° for angle milling and oblique drilling\u003cbr\u003e Cross table 700 x 180 mm with 490 x 150 mm travel\u003cbr\u003e DC motor with high torque even at low speeds\u003cbr\u003e Guaranteed concentricity ≤0.015 mm thanks to precision tapered bearings\u003cbr\u003e Adjustable dovetail guides on X, Y, and Z axes\u003cbr\u003e Integrated digital displays for speed and spindle travel\u003cbr\u003e Height-adjustable protection with microswitch\u003cbr\u003e LED light and EMC filter compliant with CE standards\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical table:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFace milling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax. 63 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd milling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax. 25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle–column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e170 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle–table distance min.\/max.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 – 315 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e52 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 – 1400 \/ 100 – 2600 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e700 x 180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable travel (X \/ Y)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e490 \/ 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHead tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e-90° to +90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHead height adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e265 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slot size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 100%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.90 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 40%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.35 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)*\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e940 x 650 x 930 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 135 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e*without stand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePackage contents:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e Drill chuck 3–16 mm \/ B16\u003cbr\u003e Drill arbor MT 3 \/ B16\u003cbr\u003e Drawbar\u003cbr\u003e LED work light\u003cbr\u003e Digital spindle travel display\u003cbr\u003e Digital speed display\u003cbr\u003e CE compliant EMC filter\u003cbr\u003e Height-adjustable protection\u003cbr\u003e Cable chain\u003cbr\u003e Tool set\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer service available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between the KF series and the BF\/FM series in the Bernardo range?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe KF series (KF 16, KF 20, KF 25, KF 28) is the compact range: smaller tables, MT2\/MT3 tapers, suitable for workshops with limited space and small-to-medium-sized operations. The BF series (BF 25, BF 30, BF 35, BF 40, BF 45) and FM series (FM 40, FM 45, FM 50, FM 55) are the professional versions: larger tables, MT3\/MT4 tapers, more powerful motors, greater travel — for medium-sized parts in continuous production. The FM series has a 360° tilting head which the KF does not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat do the suffixes \"Vario\" and \"HSV\" mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario: continuously variable spindle speed without changing belts. HSV: spindle head with tilt from -90° to +90° (Head Swivel Variable). BDC: integrated 3-axis digital position display (Digital Readout). The combination HSV + Vario is the most flexible configuration for workshops working with different materials and geometries.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 3-axis DRO included as standard or is it an option?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the model. Models with \"BDC\", \"DT 40\", \"ES-12V\" or \"with 3-axis display\" in the name include the digital display as standard. Models without this designation do not include it — it is available as an optional accessory. Please check the specific model description.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer service available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop for the BF\/FM series?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBF and FM milling machines are stationary workshop machines — not portable. Consider space for X and Y axis travel plus at least 60 cm clear space on each side for safe operation. Contact Krollit for full dimensions of the specific model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50697008972104,"sku":"02-1034","price":2130.19,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_KF_28_Top_Trapano-fresatrice_compatta_con_velocit_variabile.png?v=1757578506"},{"product_id":"trapano-fresatrice-bernardo-kf28-top","title":"Bernardo Drilling and Milling Machine KF 28 Top with Automatic Feed","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo Milling and Drilling Machine KF 28 Top with Automatic Feed \u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo KF 28 Top milling and drilling machine is a professional machine suitable for a wide range of operations such as keyway milling, facing, angular drilling, threading, and boring. Thanks to its 2-stage gearbox and continuous speed control (50–2600 rpm), it allows optimal adaptation to different materials and workpiece requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine is equipped with automatic feed on the X-axis, a swiveling head ±90°, and a large cross table (700 x 180 mm) with travel of 430 x 150 mm. The tapered roller gears and precision bearings ensure concentricity ≤0.015 mm, while the dovetail guides on the X, Y, and Z axes provide stability and precision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eComplete with digital speed and spindle travel indicator, EMC filter, LED light, and integrated guards, the KF 28 Top is a compact and high-performance solution for workshops and mechanical laboratories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eKey Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003e Versatile drilling and milling machine for milling, drilling, boring, and threading\u003cbr\u003e 2-stage gearbox with continuously adjustable speeds (50–2600 rpm)\u003cbr\u003e Automatic X-axis feed as standard\u003cbr\u003e Head inclinable ±90° for angular machining and chamfers\u003cbr\u003e Cross table 700 x 180 mm with travel 430 x 150 mm\u003cbr\u003e Digital speed and spindle travel indicator included as standard\u003cbr\u003e DC motor with optimal torque even at low speeds\u003cbr\u003e Guaranteed concentricity ≤0.015 mm thanks to precision tapered bearings\u003cbr\u003e Dovetail guides on X, Y, Z axes adjustable with gibs\u003cbr\u003e LED light, adjustable guard, and EMC filter as standard\u003cbr\u003e Compact structure, suitable for workshops and small laboratories\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical specifications:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity in steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFace milling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax. 63 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd milling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax. 25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e170 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-table distance min.\/max.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 – 315 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e52 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 – 1400 \/ 100 – 2600 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT 3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e700 x 180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable travel (X \/ Y)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e430 \/ 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHead tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e-90° to +90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHead height adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e265 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slot size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 100%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.90 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 40%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.35 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)*\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e940 x 650 x 930 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 135 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e*without base\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePackage contents:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e Drill chuck 3–16 mm \/ B16\u003cbr\u003e Spindle arbor MT 3 \/ B16\u003cbr\u003e Drawbar\u003cbr\u003e X-axis automatic feed\u003cbr\u003e LED work light\u003cbr\u003e Digital spindle travel indicator\u003cbr\u003e Digital speed indicator\u003cbr\u003e CE compliant EMC filter\u003cbr\u003e Height-adjustable guard\u003cbr\u003e Cable chain\u003cbr\u003e Tool set\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between the KF series and the BF\/FM series in the Bernardo range?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe KF series (KF 16, KF 20, KF 25, KF 28) is the compact range: smaller tables, MT2\/MT3 tapers, suitable for workshops with limited space and small-to-medium sized work. The BF series (BF 25, BF 30, BF 35, BF 40, BF 45) and FM series (FM 40, FM 45, FM 50, FM 55) are the professional versions: larger tables, MT3\/MT4 tapers, more powerful motors, greater travel — for medium-sized parts in continuous production. The FM series has a 360° tilting head that the KF does not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat do the suffixes \"Vario\" and \"HSV\" mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario: continuously adjustable spindle speed without changing belts. HSV: spindle head with tilt from −90° to +90° (Head Swivel Variable). BDC: integrated 3-axis digital position display (Digital Readout). The combination HSV + Vario is the most flexible configuration for workshops working with different materials and geometries.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 3-axis DRO included as standard or is it an option?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the model. Models with the designation \"BDC\", \"DT 40\", \"ES-12V\" or \"with 3-axis display\" in the name include the digital display as standard. Models without this designation do not include it — it is available as an optional accessory. Check the description of the specific model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop for the BF\/FM series?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBF and FM milling machines are fixed workshop machines — not portable. Consider space for X and Y axis travel plus at least 60 cm clear space on each side for safe operation. Contact Krollit for the full dimensions of the specific model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50697019457864,"sku":"02-10340","price":2547.45,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_KF_28_Top_Trapano-fresatrice_compatta_con_avanzamento_automatico.jpg?v=1757519218"},{"product_id":"troncatrice-a-doppia-inclinazione-zkg-305-d-230v","title":"Bernardo ZKG 305 D Double Bevel Mitre Saw - 230 V","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo ZKG 305 D Dual Bevel Mitre Saw – 230 V\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo ZKG 305 D mitre saw is a dual-bevel mitre saw for hobbyist to professional use, featuring a 305 mm HM blade, a 1.6 kW motor, and a rotational speed of 4,800 rpm. It allows for straight, bevel, and compound cuts with capacities up to 340 × 95 mm. Manufactured by the Austrian brand Bernardo, it has been distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBlade diameter: 305 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eRotational speed: 4,800 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eMotor power: 1.6 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eVoltage: 230 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCutting capacity 90°: 340 × 95 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBevel cut 45°: 240 × 95 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eMiter cut 45°: 340 × 55 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCompound cut 45°: 240 × 55 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eWeight: 28 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eDimensions: 860 × 900 × 680 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the ZKG 305 D and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ZKG 305 D is used by carpenters, installers, and craftsmen who work with wood, panels, and profiles. It is suitable for precision cuts on skirting boards, joists, and light structures. In advanced home use, it is employed for carpentry and renovation work, thanks to its ability to perform compound cuts and the integrated laser guide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShipping 5-9 working days (7 days for southern regions). Technical assistance in Italian available for the entire product lifespan. Original Bernardo spare parts available from Krollit warehouse, Monteforte Irpino (AV).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the ZKG 305 D for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdvanced hobbyists\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 mm blade and 340 mm capacity for advanced home projects.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCraftsmen and installers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompound cuts and integrated laser for precise work on site.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.6 kW motor designed for intermittent use, not for intensive cycles.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e continuous use in industrial production or intensive cuts on high-strength materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCutting capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° \/ 90° cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e340 × 95 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45° bevel cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e240 × 95 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45° miter cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e340 × 55 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45° compound cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e240 × 55 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.6 kW (2.2 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStructure and dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade rotational speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,800 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e860 × 900 × 680 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e28 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHM blade Ø 305 × 25.4 mm – 80 teeth\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eTable extension\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eExtendable stop guides\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eIntegrated laser device\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eChip collection bag\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eWorkpiece clamp\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eControl device\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eUser manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum cutting capacity of the ZKG 305 D?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe maximum capacity is 340 × 95 mm at 90°, suitable for joists and large panels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThis capacity allows for working with structural elements and wide pieces. For angled or compound cuts, the capacity reduces to 240 × 55 mm, still maintaining good operational versatility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eCan the machine perform compound cuts?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eYes, it allows for compound cuts with simultaneous inclination and rotation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe head can be tilted left and right for mitres up to 45°, while the rotating base allows for bevel cuts. This enables working on frames, profiles, and complex joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eIs the integrated laser precise?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe laser helps in positioning the workpiece during cutting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eIt allows you to visualize the cutting line before the blade starts. It does not replace manual adjustment but improves speed in repetitive tasks and reduces alignment errors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eIs it suitable for working with materials other than wood?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eIt is primarily designed for wood and wood-derived materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWith the included 80-tooth HM blade, it is suitable for wood and panels. For other materials, it is necessary to check compatibility with specific blades, but it is not designed for metals or heavy-duty use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eDoes it require frequent maintenance?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eMaintenance is limited to cleaning and blade inspection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eIt is advisable to remove chips and dust after each use, check the blade tightening, and verify the correct functioning of the laser and locking systems to maintain constant precision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50697153872200,"sku":"09-1005","price":279.78,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_Troncatrice_a_doppia_inclinazione_ZKG_305_D_230V.jpg?v=1777725879"},{"product_id":"tubo-di-aspirazione-a-spirale-diam-160-mm-6-m","title":"Bernardo Suction hose, spiral, 160 mm diameter (6 m)","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo Spiral Suction Hose Ø160 mm (6 m) with Steel Spiral\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eBernardo Spiral Suction Hose Ø160 mm (6 m)\u003c\/strong\u003e is a professional duct for industrial and woodworking dust extraction systems, designed for \u003cstrong\u003eoperational efficiency and long life\u003c\/strong\u003e. Constructed from \u003cstrong\u003eprofessional-grade transparent plastic material\u003c\/strong\u003e, it allows for immediate visual inspection of chip and dust flow. The \u003cstrong\u003egalvanized steel spiral\u003c\/strong\u003e integrated into the structure offers high resistance to crushing, twisting, and abrasion, while maintaining excellent flexibility. With its 160 mm diameter and 6-meter length, it is suitable for connecting Bernardo machinery, fittings, and joints, ensuring constant airflow and stable suction. Suitable for \u003cstrong\u003eworkshops, laboratories, and professional extraction systems\u003c\/strong\u003e, this hose combines \u003cstrong\u003erobustness, transparency, and ease of use\u003c\/strong\u003e in a single professional-grade component.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eKey Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e Bernardo Suction Hose Ø160 mm, 6 m length\u003cbr\u003e Made of high-strength and flexible transparent plastic\u003cbr\u003e Integrated galvanized steel spiral for structural reinforcement\u003cbr\u003e Crush-proof, twist-proof, and abrasion-resistant\u003cbr\u003e Transparent for monitoring suction flow\u003cbr\u003e Suitable for chips, fine dust, and processing residues\u003cbr\u003e Compatible with standard Bernardo extractors and systems\u003cbr\u003e Suitable for woodworking shops, workshops, and industrial extraction systems\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical Table:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSpecification\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eValue\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpiral Suction Hose Ø160 mm (6 m)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInternal Diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent plastic with galvanized steel spiral\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlexibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eResistance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCrush-proof, twist-proof, abrasion-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApplication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuction of chips and fine dust\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo systems and extractors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAustria\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePackage contents:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e 1 × Bernardo Spiral Suction Hose Ø160 mm (6 m)\u003cbr\u003e Manual with installation instructions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo Shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between PVC, PU spiral, and PA spiral hoses?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRigid PVC hose: economical, suitable for fixed installations with little flexibility. PU (polyurethane) spiral hose: flexible and abrasion-resistant — suitable for mobile use with coarse chips and metallic dust. PA (polyamide) spiral hose: more rigid than PU but resistant to higher temperatures and oils\/solvents. The choice depends on the type of dust being extracted and the required mobility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the hose diameter need to exactly match the extractor outlet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes — or use an adapter. A reduction in diameter causes a loss of flow and can cause the circuit to whistle. An increase in diameter requires a conical adapter. To maximize performance, use the same diameter as the extractor outlet for the entire length of the main hose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long does a spiral hose last in professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use with abrasive chips (metal, MDF, stone): 1–3 years depending on the intensity of use. PU is the most abrasion-resistant. Signs of wear include: visible abrasion of the outer spiral, diameter reduction due to crushing, air leaks at joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 6 m length sufficient for most systems?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor machine-to-extractor connections in standard laboratories (machine 2–4 m from the extractor), yes. For longer distances or centralized systems, rigid PVC sections are used for the fixed path, and the flexible hose is used only for the final movable section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50697158132040,"sku":"12-1080","price":232.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_Tubo_di_aspirazione_a_spirale_160_mm_6_m_trasparente_con_spirale_in_acciaio.jpg?v=1761820921"},{"product_id":"tubo-di-aspirazione-a-spirale-in-pvc-diam-100-mm-10-m-12-1070","title":"Bernardo PVC Pipe diam. 100 mm (10 m)","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo PVC Hose Ø100 mm (10 m) Transparent with Steel Spiral\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eBernardo PVC Hose Ø100 mm (10 m)\u003c\/strong\u003e is a flexible and durable hose suitable for industrial extraction systems and woodworking machines. Made of \u003cstrong\u003ehigh-resistance transparent PVC\u003c\/strong\u003e and reinforced with a \u003cstrong\u003egalvanized steel spiral\u003c\/strong\u003e, it guarantees excellent flexibility combined with great mechanical stability. Its anti-crushing and anti-kinking structure maintains a constant and powerful airflow, even over long stretches. The transparency of the material allows for visual inspection of chip and dust flow, simplifying maintenance. With its \u003cstrong\u003e100 mm diameter and 10-meter length\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is suitable for connecting extractors, machine tools, and Bernardo systems, offering \u003cstrong\u003eefficiency, durability, and professional practicality\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eKey Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e Bernardo suction hose Ø100 mm, 10 m length\u003cbr\u003e Made of professional-grade transparent PVC\u003cbr\u003e Internal galvanized steel spiral for structural reinforcement\u003cbr\u003e Anti-crushing, anti-kinking, and abrasion resistant\u003cbr\u003e Extremely flexible for installations on curved paths\u003cbr\u003e Allows visual inspection of airflow and chips\u003cbr\u003e Compatible with Bernardo extractors and extraction systems\u003cbr\u003e Suitable for joineries, workshops, and industrial laboratories\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical table:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSpecification\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eValue\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVC Hose Ø100 mm (10 m)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInternal diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent PVC with galvanized steel spiral\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlexibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eResistance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAnti-crushing, anti-kinking, anti-abrasion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApplication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChip and fine dust extraction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo systems and extractors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAustria\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePackage contents:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e 1 × Bernardo PVC Hose Ø100 mm (10 m)\u003cbr\u003e Manual with installation instructions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo Shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between PVC, PU spiral, and PA spiral hoses?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRigid PVC hose: economical, suitable for fixed installations with low flexibility. PU (polyurethane) spiral hose: flexible and abrasion-resistant — suitable for mobile use with coarse chips and metallic dusts. PA (polyamide) spiral hose: more rigid than PU but resistant to higher temperatures and oils\/solvents. The choice depends on the type of dust aspirated and the required mobility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the hose diameter need to match the extractor outlet exactly?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes — or an adapter should be used. A reduction in diameter causes a loss of flow rate and can make the circuit whistle. An increase in diameter requires a conical adapter. To maximize performance, use the same diameter as the extractor outlet for the entire length of the main hose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long does a spiral hose last in professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use with abrasive chips (metal, MDF, stone): 1–3 years depending on the intensity of use. PU is the most abrasion-resistant. Signs of wear are: visible abrasion of the external spiral, reduction in diameter due to crushing, air leaks in the joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 6 m length sufficient for most systems?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor machine-to-extractor connections in standard laboratories (machine 2–4 m from the extractor), yes. For longer distances or centralized systems, rigid PVC sections are used for the fixed path and the flexible hose is used only for the final mobile section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50697176482120,"sku":"12-1070","price":130.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_Tubo_in_PVC_100_mm_10_m_trasparente_con_spirale_in_acciaio.jpg?v=1762181105"},{"product_id":"tubo-di-aspirazione-a-spirale-pu-diam-100-mm-6-m-12-1077","title":"Bernardo Spiral Suction Hose PU dia. 100 mm (6 m)","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo PU Spiral Suction Hose Ø100 mm (6 m) with Steel Spiral\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eBernardo PU Spiral Suction Hose Ø100 mm (6 m)\u003c\/strong\u003e is a heavy-duty professional duct suitable for industrial dust collection systems and chip evacuation systems. Made of \u003cstrong\u003etransparent polyurethane (PU)\u003c\/strong\u003e with an \u003cstrong\u003eintegrated steel reinforcing spiral\u003c\/strong\u003e, it combines excellent flexibility and robustness, ensuring a long service life even under intensive use conditions. Its flexible and crush-proof structure allows for easy installation even on curved paths, maintaining a constant and powerful airflow. The transparent material allows for \u003cstrong\u003evisual inspection of chips and dust passing through\u003c\/strong\u003e, facilitating maintenance. Suitable for use with Bernardo dust collectors and systems, this hose is the right choice for \u003cstrong\u003ewoodworking shops, workshops, and industrial laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e that require \u003cstrong\u003eefficiency, durability, and maximum operational safety\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eMain Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e Bernardo suction hose Ø100 mm, length 6 m\u003cbr\u003e Made of high-resistance transparent polyurethane (PU)\u003cbr\u003e Integrated galvanized steel spiral for structural reinforcement\u003cbr\u003e Flexible, crush-proof, and abrasion-resistant\u003cbr\u003e Transparent material for visual flow control\u003cbr\u003e Suitable for dust collectors, extraction systems, and woodworking machinery\u003cbr\u003e Compatible with standard Bernardo fittings and sleeves\u003cbr\u003e Suitable for woodworking shops, workshops, and industrial extraction systems\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical Table:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSpecification\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eValue\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePU Spiral Suction Hose Ø100 mm (6 m)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInternal Diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent Polyurethane (PU) with steel spiral\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlexibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eResistance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCrush-proof, twist-proof, abrasion-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApplication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChip and fine dust extraction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo systems and dust collectors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAustria\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePackage Contents:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e 1 × Bernardo PU Spiral Suction Hose Ø100 mm (6 m)\u003cbr\u003e Manual with installation instructions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo Shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between PVC, PU spiral, and PA spiral hose?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRigid PVC hose: economical, suitable for fixed installations with little flexibility. PU (polyurethane) spiral hose: flexible and abrasion-resistant — suitable for mobile use with coarse chips and metallic dust. PA (polyamide) spiral hose: more rigid than PU but resistant to higher temperatures and oils\/solvents. The choice depends on the type of dust extracted and the necessary mobility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the hose diameter need to exactly match the dust collector outlet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes — or use an adapter. A reduction in diameter causes a loss of flow rate and can make the circuit whistle. An increase in diameter requires a conical adapter. To maximize performance, use the same diameter as the dust collector outlet for the entire length of the main hose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long does a spiral hose last in professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use with abrasive chips (metal, MDF, stone): 1–3 years depending on the intensity of use. PU is the most abrasion-resistant. Signs of wear include: visible abrasion of the outer spiral, reduction in diameter due to crushing, air leaks at joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 6 m length sufficient for most systems?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor machine-to-collector connections in standard workshops (machine 2–4 m from the collector), yes. For longer distances or centralized systems, rigid PVC sections are used for the fixed path and the flexible hose is used only for the final mobile section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50697199878472,"sku":"12-1077","price":140.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_Tubo_di_aspirazione_a_spirale_PU_100_mm_6_m_trasparente_con_spirale_in_acciaio.jpg?v=1761819877"},{"product_id":"tubo-di-aspirazione-a-spirale-pu-diam-120-mm-6-mm","title":"Bernardo Suction Hose PU dia. 120 mm (6 m)","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo PU Spiral Suction Hose dia. 120 mm – length 6 m\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eBernardo PU Spiral Suction Hose Ø120 mm (6 m)\u003c\/strong\u003e is a professional flexible hose made of \u003cstrong\u003etransparent polyurethane (PU)\u003c\/strong\u003e with a \u003cstrong\u003egalvanized steel reinforcement spiral\u003c\/strong\u003e, designed for maximum strength and durability in industrial dust extraction systems. Suitable for conveying chips, dust, and lightweight materials, it ensures smooth airflow and a long operational life even under intensive working conditions. Its flexible and crush-proof structure allows for easy installation on Bernardo machinery and fittings, maintaining high stability even on curved paths. The transparent material also allows for visual inspection of the flow, improving system safety and maintenance. Suitable for \u003cstrong\u003ewoodworking shops, workshops, and professional dust extraction systems\u003c\/strong\u003e, it combines \u003cstrong\u003estrength, efficiency, and flexibility\u003c\/strong\u003e in a single, professional-quality product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eMain specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e Bernardo suction hose Ø120 mm, 6 m length\u003cbr\u003e Made of transparent polyurethane (PU), highly resistant and flexible\u003cbr\u003e Integrated galvanized steel spiral for increased robustness\u003cbr\u003e Crush-proof and resistant to abrasion and torsion\u003cbr\u003e Allows visual inspection of the suction flow\u003cbr\u003e Compatible with standard Bernardo fittings and sleeves\u003cbr\u003e Suitable for dust extraction systems, woodworking shops, and industrial workshops\u003cbr\u003e Simple, stable, and long-lasting installation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical table:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSpecification\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eValue\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePU Spiral Suction Hose Ø120 mm (6 m)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInternal diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent Polyurethane (PU) with steel spiral\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlexibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eResistance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCrush-proof, anti-torsion, anti-abrasion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApplication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExtraction of chips and fine dust\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo systems and extractors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAustria\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePackage contents:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e 1 × Bernardo PU Spiral Suction Hose Ø120 mm (6 m)\u003cbr\u003e User manual with installation instructions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days in the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between PVC, PU spiral, and PA spiral hose?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRigid PVC hose: economical, suitable for fixed installations with little flexibility. PU (polyurethane) spiral hose: flexible and abrasion-resistant — suitable for mobile use with coarse chips and metallic dust. PA (polyamide) spiral hose: more rigid than PU but resistant to higher temperatures and oils\/solvents. The choice depends on the type of dust extracted and the required mobility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the hose diameter need to exactly match the extractor outlet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes — or an adapter is used. A reduction in diameter causes loss of flow rate and can make the circuit whistle. An increase in diameter requires a conical adapter. To maximize performance, use the same diameter as the extractor outlet for the entire length of the main hose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long does a spiral hose last in professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use with abrasive chips (metal, MDF, stone): 1–3 years depending on intensity of use. PU is the most abrasion-resistant. Signs of wear are: visible abrasion of the external spiral, reduction of diameter due to crushing, air leaks at joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 6 m length sufficient for most systems?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor machine-extractor connections in standard workshops (machine 2–4 m from the extractor), yes. For longer distances or centralized systems, rigid PVC sections are used for the fixed path and the flexible hose is only used for the final mobile section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50697221669192,"sku":"12-1078","price":157.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_Tubo_di_aspirazione_a_spirale_PU_120_mm_6_m_trasparente_con_spirale_in_acciaio.jpg?v=1761820571"},{"product_id":"tubo-di-aspirazione-spiralato-in-poliuretano-dia-150-mm-6-m","title":"Bernardo PU Extraction Hose dia. 150 mm (6 m)","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo PU Suction Hose Ø150 mm (6 m) with Steel Spiral\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong style=\"font-size: 0.875rem;\"\u003eBernardo PU Suction Hose Ø150 mm (6 m)\u003c\/strong\u003e is a professional-grade flexible duct suitable for industrial extraction systems and woodworking. Made from \u003cstrong style=\"font-size: 0.875rem;\"\u003etransparent polyurethane (PU)\u003c\/strong\u003e, a material extremely resistant to abrasion and bending, it features a \u003cstrong style=\"font-size: 0.875rem;\"\u003egalvanized steel spiral\u003c\/strong\u003e that ensures robustness and structural stability. Thanks to its high flexibility and crush-proof structure, the hose ensures a constant and regular airflow, even in complex installations or around curves. The transparency of the material allows for easy monitoring of chip and dust passage, facilitating maintenance. Perfectly compatible with \u003cstrong style=\"font-size: 0.875rem;\"\u003eBernardo extractors and systems\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is the ideal choice for \u003cstrong style=\"font-size: 0.875rem;\"\u003ejoineries, workshops, and industrial laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e that demand reliability and long-lasting performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e Bernardo suction hose Ø150 mm, 6 m length\u003cbr\u003e Made from high-resistance transparent polyurethane (PU)\u003cbr\u003e Galvanized steel spiral for reinforcement and structural stability\u003cbr\u003e Crush-proof, anti-kink, and abrasion-resistant\u003cbr\u003e Extremely flexible, suitable for curved or mobile installations\u003cbr\u003e Allows visual inspection of the suction flow\u003cbr\u003e Compatible with Bernardo extractors and extraction systems\u003cbr\u003e Suitable for joineries, workshops, and industrial environments\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical table:\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSpecification\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eValue\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePU Suction Hose Ø150 mm (6 m)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInternal diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent polyurethane (PU) with galvanized steel spiral\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlexibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eResistance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCrush-proof, anti-kink, abrasion-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApplication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuction of chips, dust, and processing residues\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo systems and extractors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAustria\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePackage contents:\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e 1 × Bernardo PU Suction Hose Ø150 mm (6 m)\u003cbr\u003e Manual with installation instructions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). Original spare parts available with 3–5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between PVC hose, PU spiral, and PA spiral?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRigid PVC hose: economical, suitable for fixed installations with limited flexibility. PU (polyurethane) spiral hose: flexible and abrasion-resistant – suitable for mobile use with coarse chips and metallic dust. PA (polyamide) spiral hose: more rigid than PU but resistant to higher temperatures and oils\/solvents. The choice depends on the type of dust extracted and the required mobility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the hose diameter need to exactly match the extractor outlet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes – or an adapter should be used. A reduction in diameter causes a loss of flow rate and can make the circuit whistle. An increase in diameter requires a conical adapter. To maximize performance, use the same diameter as the extractor outlet for the entire length of the main hose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long does a spiral hose last in professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use with abrasive chips (metal, MDF, stone): 1–3 years depending on the intensity of use. PU is the most abrasion-resistant. Signs of wear include: visible abrasion of the outer spiral, reduction in diameter due to crushing, air leaks at joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 6 m length sufficient for most systems?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor machine-extractor connections in standard workshops (machine 2–4 m from the extractor), yes. For longer distances or centralized systems, rigid PVC sections are used for the fixed path and the flexible hose is used only for the final mobile section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50697243558216,"sku":"12-1079A","price":197.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_Tubo_di_aspirazione_in_PU_150_mm_6_m_trasparente_con_spirale_in_acciaio.jpg?v=1762182020"},{"product_id":"squadratrice-tk-315-p-2000-230-v","title":"Bernardo Panel Saw TK 315 P - 2000 - 230 V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo TK 315 P - 2000 - 230 V is a professional woodworking panel saw with a 3.0 kW (4.0 HP) motor, weighing 258 kg. Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable size: 825 x 800 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSliding carriage: 2000 x 270 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting length: 2000 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. blade diameter: 315 x 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. cutting height 90° \/ 45°: 100 \/ 80 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting width on rip fence: 1240 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable height: 870 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable extension: 500 x 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TK 315 P - 2000 - 230 V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional carpentry workshops use the TK 315 P - 2000 - 230 V for squaring panels with a sliding carriage, cutting chipboard, MDF, and solid wood panels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo TK 315 P - 2000 - 230 V fits into the Bernardo panel saw range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TK 315 P - 2000 - 230 V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional carpentry workshops\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSquaring panels with sliding carriage for precise 90° cuts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFurniture manufacturers and window\/door production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting chipboard, MDF, and solid wood panels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetal sheet processing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dedicated to wood: metal requires specific shears and saws\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e metal sheet processing (machine dedicated to wood: metal requires specific shears and saws).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. cutting height 90° \/ 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 \/ 80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting width on rip fence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScoring saw speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5800 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e870 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2000 x 2870 x 1140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable extension\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500 x 310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power (S1 100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power (S6 40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.2 kW (5.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e825 x 800 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSliding carriage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2000 x 270 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. blade diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e315 x 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e800 x 440 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSquaring table with roller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e700 x 580 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScoring blade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90 x 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExtraction outlet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e258 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat panel dimensions can it square?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Carriage size\" and \"Useful carriage length\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional sliding carriages measure 2,000-3,200 mm. Longer panels require larger industrial panel saws.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have a scoring saw for coated panels?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer a scoring saw as standard or optional to prevent chipping on MDF and laminates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe scoring saw performs a shallow pre-cut before the main cut, eliminating the problem of chipping on the visible side of the panel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting height and angle does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Max cutting height\" and \"Blade tilt\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlade tilt (typically 0-46°) allows for 45° cuts for joints and chamfered edges. Check the useful height at 45°, which is less than the maximum at 90°.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eRequired power supply and power?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional panel saws require 400 V three-phase with motors from 4 to 7 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the capacity of the electrical line and the presence of a dedicated residual current device.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFrom 200 kg to over 800 kg for industrial models complete with long carriage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation requires a flat and level floor. For continuous use, anchoring with bolts is recommended for stability during more demanding operations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50697650078024,"sku":"09-11083","price":2989.1,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Sega_circolare_TK_315_P_-_2000_con_incisore_e_carro_da_2000_mm_-_versione_230_V.jpg?v=1751966832"},{"product_id":"sega-a-nastro-orizzontale-a-doppia-colonna","title":"Metal Bandsaw Bernardo CBS 280","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo CBS 280 is a professional metal bandsaw with a 0.55 kW motor and a weight of 670 kg. Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBandsaw blade\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHydraulic vice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCooling system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHydraulic cylinder for lowering\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWork light\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor protection switch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting pressure adjustment\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the CBS 280 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the CBS 280 for cutting steel, aluminum, and cast iron profiles and bars, sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo CBS 280 is part of Bernardo's range of metal bandsaws, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the CBS 280 for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting steel profiles and bars with acceptable tolerance for subsequent processing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTurners and industrial maintenance workers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSectioning raw materials before turning or milling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePrecision cutting on thin sheet metal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor thin sheet metal, consider hydraulic shears or metal circular saws\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e precision cutting on thin sheet metal (for thin sheet metal, consider hydraulic shears or metal circular saws).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCircular cutting area at 90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat cutting area at 90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e280 x 280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSquare cutting area at 90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e280 x 280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e27 \/ 45 \/ 69 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e670 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSaw blade dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3505 x 27 x 0.9 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1670 x 1130 x 1640 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydraulic pump motor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.55 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCoolant pump\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.045 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximate weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e670 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the CBS 280 cut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfiles, tubes, solid bars, and rolled sections in steel, aluminum, and cast iron within the indicated section limits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cutting capacity is expressed in mm of maximum section for round, square, and rectangular profiles. For extra-hard materials, reduce the blade speed and use blades with appropriate tooth pitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBimetal blade for cutting steel, carbon steel blade for soft metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit supplies original Bernardo blades with various tooth pitches to optimize cutting based on material type and thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting speed does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Band speed\" data in the technical table: typically adjustable in 2-4 steps or continuously (Vario).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (15-30 m\/min) for alloy steels, high speeds (50-80 m\/min) for light alloys and aluminum. Incorrect selection accelerates blade wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated cooling?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models are equipped with a cooling pump with a collection tank and drip tray.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCooling (with cutting oil or emulsion) extends blade life and improves cutting quality on hard materials. For dry cutting, use specific blades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and how is it installed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Weight\" data in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 150 to over 400 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSaws over 200 kg require adequate flooring and fastening. The machine must be positioned in a clear space for handling long profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50697664299336,"sku":"04-1726XL","price":6222.21,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/04-1726xl_1.jpg?v=1750092196"},{"product_id":"bernardo-affilatrice-universale-uws-350","title":"Bernardo UWS 350 Grinding Machine","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo UWS 350 is a professional grinding machine, with a 0.55 kW – 400 V motor, weighing approx. 197 kg. Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBrand: Bernardo\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eModel: UWS 350\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. workpiece diameter: 260 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable dimensions: 640 x 130 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLongitudinal table travel: 330 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCross table travel: 195 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVertical grinding head inclination: -45° \/ +45°\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHorizontal grinding head inclination: -45° \/ +45°\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the UWS 350 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and tool laboratories use the UWS 350 for sharpening drill bits, milling cutters, and cutting tools, restoring the geometry of worn tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo UWS 350 is part of the Bernardo grinding machine range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the UWS 350 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMechanical workshops and tool laboratories\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSharpening HSS drill bits, milling cutters, and cutting tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial maintenance technicians\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRestoring geometry of worn tools to reduce replacement costs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSharpening carbide or ceramic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTo be evaluated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor HM, a CBN\/diamond wheel is needed: verify model compatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e applications that deviate from the technical specifications declared by the manufacturer. For doubts about compatibility, contact Krollit customer support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrinding spindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrive unit with 3-jaw chuck Ø 80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003evertical inclination -35° \/ +35° – horizontal rotation 360°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrive unit speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1300 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e640 x 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLongitudinal table travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCross table travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e195 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVertical grinding head inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e-45° \/ +45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHorizontal grinding head inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e-45° \/ +45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)*\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e870 x 650 x 800 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrinding motor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.55 kW – 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrive unit motor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90 W – 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUWS 350\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. workpiece diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 197 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNote\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e*without base\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the UWS 350 sharpen?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHSS drill bits, end mills, disc cutters, and cutting tools within the dimensional limits of the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSharpening capacity is limited by grinding wheel diameter and angular adjustment. For carbide tools (HM), verify CBN\/diamond wheel compatibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat sharpening precision does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo professional models allow sharpening with tolerances of ±0.02 mm on the cutting angle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePrecision depends on machine rigidity and guide quality. Models with fine calibration allow angular adjustment to the tenth of a degree.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of grinding wheel is supplied?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCorundum grinding wheel for standard HSS sharpening. For HM, a CBN or diamond wheel needs to be purchased separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit supplies original Bernardo replacement grinding wheels with delivery times of 3-5 working days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have a cooling system?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional grinding machines offer manual drip cooling or a dedicated pump.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCooling prevents tempering of the tool during sharpening and maintains the hardness of the edge. It is essential for delicate sharpening.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Weight\" data in the technical table: professional models weigh from 50 to over 200 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBenchtop grinders are installed on a robust workbench, while column models require floor mounting for stability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50697684615496,"sku":"05-13651","price":4184.75,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Smerigliatrice_universale_Bernardo_UWS_350_per_utensili.png?v=1758268410"},{"product_id":"tornio-per-legno-laguna-revo-1216","title":"Laguna Revo 1216 Wood Lathe","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Laguna Revo 1216 is a wood lathe for professional use, with a distance between centers of 390 mm, a 750 W motor, and a weight of 56.3 kg. Krollit has been an official Laguna distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: REVO 1216\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecommended use: Professional production\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower (230 V): 750 W\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpeed (3 ranges): 50–525 \/ 325–1750 \/ 650–3500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax working diameter: 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDistance between centers: 390 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle thread: M33 × 3.5 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeadstock \/ Tailstock taper: MK2 \/ MK2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Revo 1216 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eArtisan woodturners and carpentry workshops use the Revo 1216 for turning chair legs, vases, bowls, and decorative objects, including the creation of turned elements for furniture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Laguna range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Laguna Revo 1216 is part of the Laguna wood lathe range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Laguna range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Laguna catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Revo 1216 for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisan woodturners\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTurning chair legs, vases, bowls, and decorative objects\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarpentry workshops and restoration labs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCreation of turned elements for furniture and historical reconstruction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetal turning\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dedicated to wood: metal requires specific lathes with adequate torque and speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e metal turning (machine dedicated to wood: metal requires specific lathes with adequate torque and speed).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed (3 ranges)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50–525 \/ 325–1750 \/ 650–3500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e390 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle thread\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM33 × 3.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (LxWxH)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 × 226 × 442 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions (LxWxH)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e920 × 380 × 520 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower (230 V)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eREVO 1216\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax working diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeadstock \/ Tailstock taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK2 \/ MK2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeadstock \/ Tailstock bore\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17 \/ 17 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eQuill travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e63 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e56.3 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight including packaging\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e61 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat size workpiece can the Revo 1216 turn?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Distance between centers\" and \"Max diameter over bed\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench lathes handle workpieces up to 700-1,000 mm between centers; professional models reach 1,500 mm and beyond. For large diameter bowls, check the free overhang.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the spindle speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, adjustment via belt change (stepped) or electronic variator (Vario) depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (200-500 rpm) for large diameter workpieces or roughing, high speeds (1,500-3,000 rpm) for finishing on small workpieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle attachment does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically M33x3.5 thread or MK 2 on the spindle. Check the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard attachments allow the use of interchangeable accessories (self-centering chucks for bowls, live centers, etc.) available on the market.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat motor power does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Motor power\" in the technical table: typically 0.5-2 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor intensive turning of large workpieces, at least 1.5 kW is needed. Hobby bench models range from 0.3 to 0.75 kW for occasional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFrom about 30 kg (mini-lathes) to over 200 kg (professional with base).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor intensive use, a lathe weighing over 80 kg is recommended to dampen vibrations and ensure machining precision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Laguna","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50697721676104,"sku":"151-1216","price":1650.25,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Tornio_compatto_Laguna_REVO_1216_perhobbisti_e_professionisti.png?v=1759245744"},{"product_id":"bernardo-smerigliatrice-a-piastra-ts-300-p","title":"Belt and Disc Sander Bernardo TS 300 P","description":"\u003cp\u003eBernardo TS 300 P is a sander for professional use, with a 0.75 kW motor, weighing 32 kg. Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBrand: Bernardo\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eModel: TS 300 P\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAbrasive disc: Ø 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable dimensions: 440 x 128 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable tilt: 0° – +45°\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDisc speed: 1400 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDust extraction: Ø 60 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power (S1 100%): 0.75 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TS 300 P and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and carpentry shops use the TS 300 P for sanding and satin finishing stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys, removing burrs, and surface finishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo TS 300 P is part of the Bernardo sander range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare part order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TS 300 P for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMechanical workshops for metal finishing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSanding and satin finishing of stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarpentry shops and production workshops\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBurr removal, cutting burr removal, and surface finishing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMirror chrome polishing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor final chroming, dedicated polishers with abrasive pastes are needed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e mirror chrome polishing (for final chroming, dedicated polishers with abrasive pastes are needed).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDisc speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1400 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e440 x 128 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0° – +45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e440 x 450 x 380 mm*\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power (S1 100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.75 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power (S6 40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.0 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTS 300 P\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbrasive disc\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e32 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the TS 300 P sand?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel, aluminum, metal alloys and (in some models) also wood with appropriate abrasive belts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor each material, a specific belt grit is used: 60-80 for roughing, 120-180 for finishing, 240+ for pre-polishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat abrasive belt size does it use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Belt dimensions\" in the technical table: typically from 75x2,000 mm to 150x2,500 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBelts are consumable spare parts: Krollit supplies original Bernardo belts in various grit sizes to optimize the finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the belt speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer Vario or multi-step speeds (typically 4-8 steps).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh speeds (\u003e20 m\/s) for stainless steel and finishing, low speeds (\u003c10 m\/s) for wood and soft materials to avoid burning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated extraction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer a dust extraction connection for grinding dust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExtraction is essential for stainless steel (respirable dust) and for wood (fire risk from sparks). Check the connection diameter for connection to a centralized system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: typically 50-200 kg for benchtop and column models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eColumn models require floor mounting; benchtop models are installed on a sturdy bench of adequate size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50697838657864,"sku":"05-1191","price":323.92,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_TS_300_P_Smerigliatrice_a_piastra_300_mm_compatta.jpg?v=1758619590"},{"product_id":"torni-bernardo-profi-650-g-400v","title":"Lathe Bernardo Profi 650 G \/ 400 V – Robust and precise","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrecision Lathe Profi 650 G \/ 400 V\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Profi 650 G \/ 400 V geared head lathe is designed for precise and reliable machining of medium-sized workpieces. With a distance between centers of 650 mm and a swing over bed of 280 mm, it offers extensive application possibilities in workshops and laboratories. The 26 mm spindle bore with MT4 taper and the Norton gearbox with 12 adjustable speeds from 70 to 2000 rpm allow for various machining operations. The machine can produce metric and imperial threads with numerous combinations, thanks to the included gear set. The robust structure (202 kg) ensures stability, while the included accessories, such as an LED light and safety guards, guarantee comfort and reliability. A professional lathe that combines power and precision, suitable for workshop turning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eMain Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003e• Distance between centers: 650 mm\u003cbr\u003e• Center height: 140 mm – Swing over bed Ø 280 mm\u003cbr\u003e• Spindle bore: 26 mm – MT4 taper\u003cbr\u003e• Geared headstock with 12 speeds: 70–2000 rpm\u003cbr\u003e• Metric threads (27) from 0.25 to 5 mm \/ Imperial threads (20) from 6 to 96 TPI\u003cbr\u003e• Longitudinal and cross feeds (15 ratios each)\u003cbr\u003e• Tailstock with 105 mm travel (MT3)\u003cbr\u003e• Robust structure with bed width of 160 mm\u003cbr\u003e• Weight 202 kg – high stability during machining\u003cbr\u003e• Machine dimensions: 1400 × 720 × 520 mm\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical table:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable class=\"w-fit min-w-(--thread-content-width)\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfi 650 G \/ 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e650 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCenter height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwing over bed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBed width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle bore\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e26 mm (MT4)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e(12) 70–2000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLongitudinal feeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e(15) 0.036–0.364 mm\/rev\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCross feeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e(15) 0.019–0.188 mm\/rev\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetric threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e(27) 0.25–5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInch threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e(20) 6–96 TPI\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e105 mm (MT3)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power output S1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.75 kW \/ 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power input S6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.0 kW \/ 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1400 × 720 × 520 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 202 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePackage contents:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e• 3-jaw self-centering chuck Ø 125 mm\u003cbr\u003e• Flange Ø 125 mm\u003cbr\u003e• Cross slide with top support\u003cbr\u003e• Fixed centers\u003cbr\u003e• Thread indicator\u003cbr\u003e• Set of spare gears\u003cbr\u003e• 4-way tool post\u003cbr\u003e• Integrated LED light\u003cbr\u003e• Spindle guard and splash guard\u003cbr\u003e• Leadscrew cover\u003cbr\u003e• Tool set\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between Hobby and Profi in the Bernardo lathe range?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Hobby series is designed for advanced hobbyists and small workshops: lower speeds, single-phase or three-phase motors of medium power, distances between centers up to 750 mm. The Profi series is for continuous professional use: more powerful motors, extended speeds, distances between centers up to 3000 mm, greater structural rigidity for machining hard materials. The suffix G indicates geared headstock; Vario indicates continuous speed adjustment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat do the suffixes \"G\" and \"Vario\" in the name mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eG (Getriebe) indicates geared speed change — more torque at low speeds, suitable for hard steels and large sections. Vario indicates continuous mechanical variator — speed can be adjusted without stopping the machine, suitable for quickly switching between roughing and finishing. Vario models have less torque at low speeds compared to G models, but more operational flexibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 3-jaw self-centering chuck included as standard?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes — Bernardo Hobby and Profi lathes include a 3-jaw self-centering chuck, live center, and basic tools as standard. Optional accessories (4-jaw chuck, steady rest, follow rest, collets) are available separately from Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eConsider at least the distance between centers clear in front and behind the lathe for workpiece handling, plus 80 cm on each side. For lathes over 300 kg, coordinate with Krollit for the necessary unloading equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714305691976,"sku":"03-1157","price":2920.78,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Tornio_di_precisione_Profi_650_G_400_V.png?v=1756731720"},{"product_id":"bernardo-tornio-metallo-di-precisione-profi-880-g-vario-400v","title":"Lathe Bernardo Profi 880 G Vario \/ 400 V – Powerful and precise","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo Profi 880 G Vario \/ 400 V Lathe\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Profi 880 G Vario \/ 400 V lathe is designed for professionals and workshops that require power, precision, and versatility. With a center distance of 880 mm and a swing over bed of 320 mm, it allows for the machining of medium-sized workpieces with great stability. The spindle with a 38 mm bore and D1-4 mount according to DIN 55029 ensures compatibility and safety. The frequency inverter provides variable speed control between 75 and 2250 rpm, adapting to every machining operation. Equipped with a digital speed display, LED light, and automatic feeds, this lathe combines comfort and high performance. Suitable for precision turning, metric and inch threading, it offers a robust 255 kg structure that increases its stability and longevity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eMain Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cbr\u003e• Distance between centers: 880 mm\u003cbr\u003e• Center height: 160 mm – Swing over bed Ø 320 mm\u003cbr\u003e• Spindle bore: 38 mm with D1-4 mount (DIN 55029)\u003cbr\u003e• Variable speed range: 75–2250 rpm with frequency inverter\u003cbr\u003e• Metric threads (18): 0.2 to 3.5 mm \/ Inch threads (21): 8 to 56 TPI\u003cbr\u003e• Automatic longitudinal and cross feeds with 15 ratios\u003cbr\u003e• Tailstock quill travel: 100 mm (MT3)\u003cbr\u003e• Digital speed display and integrated LED light\u003cbr\u003e• Machine dimensions: 1660 × 650 × 570 mm\u003cbr\u003e• Weight: 255 kg – robust and stable structure\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical table:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable class=\"w-fit min-w-(--thread-content-width)\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfi 880 G Vario \/ 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e880 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCenter height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwing over bed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle bore\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle mount\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN 55029, D1-4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–435 \/ 400–2250 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLongitudinal feeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e(15) 0.07–1.0 mm\/rev\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCross feeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e(15) 0.017–0.25 mm\/rev\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetric threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e(18) 0.2–3.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInch threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e(21) 8–56 TPI\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm (MT3)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power output S1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW \/ 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power input S6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW \/ 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1660 × 650 × 570 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 255 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePackage contents:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e• 3-jaw self-centering chuck Ø 160 mm \/ D4 mount\u003cbr\u003e• Fixed centers\u003cbr\u003e• Set of spare gears\u003cbr\u003e• 4-position tool post\u003cbr\u003e• Safety clutch\u003cbr\u003e• Micrometer longitudinal stop\u003cbr\u003e• Cross slide with top support\u003cbr\u003e• Integrated frequency inverter\u003cbr\u003e• Digital speed display\u003cbr\u003e• Thread indicator\u003cbr\u003e• Machine LED light\u003cbr\u003e• Spindle guard and splash guard\u003cbr\u003e• Lead screw cover\u003cbr\u003e• Tool kit\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). Original spare parts available with 3–5 working day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between Hobby and Profi in the Bernardo lathe range?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Hobby series is designed for advanced hobbyists and small workshops: lower speeds, single-phase or medium-power three-phase motors, center distances up to 750 mm. The Profi series is for continuous professional use: more powerful motors, extended speeds, center distances up to 3000 mm, greater structural rigidity for machining hard materials. The suffix G indicates gear change; Vario indicates continuous speed regulation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat do the suffixes \"G\" and \"Vario\" in the name mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eG (Getriebe) indicates geared speed change — more torque at low speeds, suitable for hard steels and large sections. Vario indicates continuous mechanical variator — speed can be adjusted without stopping the machine, suitable for quickly switching between roughing and finishing. Vario models have less torque at low speeds than G models, but more operational flexibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 3-jaw self-centering chuck included as standard?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes — Hobby and Profi Bernardo lathes include a 3-jaw self-centering chuck, live center, and basic tools as standard. Optional accessories (4-jaw chuck, steady rest, follow rest, collets) are available separately from Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 working day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eConsider at least the center distance free in front of and behind the lathe for workpiece handling, plus 80 cm on each side. For lathes over 300 kg, coordinate with Krollit for the necessary unloading equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714307428680,"sku":"03-1188","price":3916.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Tornio_di_precisione_Profi_880_G_Vario_400_V.png?v=1756483974"},{"product_id":"calibratrice-wbs-640-pro-230-v","title":"Bernardo WBS 640 Pro Sander","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo WBS 640 Pro is a professional-grade calibrating sander, with a sanding width of 635 mm, a 2.2 kW (3.0 PS) motor, and weighing approx. 223 kg. Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax sanding width: 635 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMin workpiece length: 127 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMin\/max workpiece thickness: 5 – 130 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable dimensions: 670 × 635 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMin working height: 850 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSanding rollers: 2 × Ø130 × 635 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the WBS 640 Pro and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional carpenters and furniture manufacturers use the WBS 640 Pro for calibrating solid wood, MDF, and plywood panels, standardizing the thickness before finishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo WBS 640 Pro is part of Bernardo's range of calibrating sanders, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the WBS 640 Pro for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe WBS 640 Pro is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfessional carpentry shops and furniture factories\u003c\/strong\u003e: calibration of solid wood, MDF, and plywood panels to standardize thickness.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRestoration workshops and custom production\u003c\/strong\u003e: calibrated sanding of large surfaces before finishing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e processing metals or plastic materials (machine dedicated to wood: specific sanders are needed for other materials).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin workpiece length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e127 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin working height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSanding rollers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 × Ø130 × 635 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e790 × 1080 × 1360 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 223 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e670 × 635 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0 – 6.2 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSanding belts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eK80 \/ K120\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax sanding width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e635 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin\/max workpiece thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1550 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 × Ø100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW (3.0 PS)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat sanding width does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Max sanding width\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor panels wider than the nominal capacity, sanding in multiple passes with precise alignment is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the minimum and maximum thickness it can process?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Min.–max. workpiece thickness\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor thin workpieces, the use of anti-vibration supports is recommended to maintain uniform pressure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have multiple sanding stations?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer 2-3 stations with different grits for roughing and finishing in a single pass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMultiple stations reduce processing times and standardize finishing quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically 400 V three-phase for professional models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the capacity of the electrical line and the presence of a dedicated residual current device.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 500 to over 1500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachines above 800 kg require industrial flooring and handling with a forklift during installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"230V","offer_id":51392990675272,"sku":"11-4353","price":3123.31,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"400V","offer_id":51392990708040,"sku":"11-4354","price":2810.98,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_WBS_640_Pro_Calibratrice_legno_635_mm_con_doppio_rullo.jpg?v=1757776652"},{"product_id":"ravendo-alu-125","title":"Ravendo ALU 125 Sack Truck","description":"\u003cp\u003eRavendo ALU 125 is a sack truck for professional use, with a load capacity of 125 kg and a weight of 7.6 kg. Krollit, official Ravendo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 125 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNet weight: 7.6 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall height (H): 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall width (W): 490 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall length (L): 460 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSupport plate – Width (B): 490 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the ALU 125 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLogistic warehouses, shops, and distribution centers use the ALU 125 for manual handling of packages, boxes, and goods of various sizes up to the stated limit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Ravendo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRavendo ALU 125 is part of the Ravendo sack truck range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Ravendo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Ravendo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipment in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipment in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the ALU 125 for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ALU 125 is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLogistics warehouses and distribution centers\u003c\/strong\u003e: manual handling of packages, boxes, and goods of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eShops, supermarkets, and service companies\u003c\/strong\u003e: transport of loads up to the stated limit in indoor spaces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e handling full pallets (for pallets, dedicated pallet trucks or forklifts are needed).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7.6 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall height (H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall width (W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e490 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall length (L)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e460 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupport plate – Width (B)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e490 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eQuantity per pallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 pcs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBearings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlain bearings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupport plate – Depth (L)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e270 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium + Plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum load it can carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Load capacity\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe load must be evenly distributed. For concentrated loads (over 50 kg\/dm²), check the rigidity of the platform and supports.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the platform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Platform dimensions\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions determine the type of goods that can be transported. For large packages, extended platforms or folding trolleys are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels brakable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer at least 2 wheels with brakes for secure parking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor use on ramps or inclined floors, it is essential to check for parking brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs it foldable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSome models fold up to take up less space during transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFolding trolleys are suitable for those who need to transport the trolley itself in a car or store it in confined spaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the frame made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically painted steel or aluminum for lighter use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel is sturdier but heavier; aluminum is lightweight and does not oxidize but has a slightly lower capacity for the same section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Ravendo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50714727809352,"sku":"145465","price":89.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/1_c47d40c2-3e8d-4f34-b8f4-aa763a67e40d.jpg?v=1780493594"},{"product_id":"torni-bernardo-profi-900-vario-230v-dro","title":"Metal Lathe Bernardo Profi 900 Vario \/ 230 V with DRO","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Profi 900 Vario \/ 230 V with DRO is a metal lathe for professional use, with a distance between centers of 900 mm, center height of 160 mm, and a weight of 240 kg (without base). Krollit has been an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDistance between centers: 900 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCenter height: 160 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSwing over bed: 320 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle bore: 38 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle nose: DIN 55029 D1-4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle speeds: 75–500 \/ 300–2000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Profi 900 Vario \/ 230 V with DRO and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan turners use the Profi 900 Vario \/ 230 V with DRO for cylindrical, conical, and thread turning operations on steels and alloys. The machine supports the production of spare parts, shafts, bushings, and small series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Profi 900 Vario \/ 230 V with DRO is part of the Bernardo metal lathe range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping is 3-5 business days from the Krollit warehouse. Customer assistance in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Profi 900 Vario \/ 230 V with DRO for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Profi 900 Vario \/ 230 V with DRO is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan turners\u003c\/strong\u003e: cylindrical, conical, and thread turning on steels and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIndustrial maintenance technicians and repair centers\u003c\/strong\u003e: machining of spare parts, shafts, bushings, and small-scale production.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHobbyists and model making\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine; for occasional home use, consider smaller benchtop models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools, and speeds\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e900 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCenter height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle nose\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN 55029 D1-4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–500 \/ 300–2000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwing over bed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle bore\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLongitudinal feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.07 – 1.0 mm\/rev (15 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCross feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.017 – 0.25 mm\/rev (15 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetric threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.2 – 3.5 mm (18 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInch threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 – 56 TPI (21 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock quill travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1650 x 650 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e240 kg (without base)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe motor S1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe motor S6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat materials can the Profi 900 Vario \/ 230 V with DRO work with?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMild steels, alloy steels, cast iron, brass, and aluminum within the cutting limits indicated in the technical specifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor hardened or high-strength alloy steels, it is advisable to reduce cutting speed and depth of cut. The machine is dimensioned for general mechanical production; for special alloys, check the compatibility of the spindle and tailstock Morse taper.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is included in the standard equipment?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe equipment includes a self-centering chuck, tailstock, steady rest, threading accessories, and a set of wrenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the exact list of accessories and spare parts provided, consult the manufacturer's technical data sheet. Krollit provides support for original Bernardo spare parts with delivery times of 3-5 business days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the voltage data in the technical table. Compact benchtop machines are often 230 V single-phase, while professional models are 400 V three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor 400 V three-phase models, an industrial power line is required. Verify the presence of adequate power supply in the workshop before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the machine suitable for series production?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the model class: professional Bernardo lathes handle continuous cycles, while benchtop models are suitable for medium use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Profi and Apollo series models are designed for intensive multi-shift use; the Hobby and Goliath series are for occasional use or small workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWeight varies significantly by model: see \"Weight\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachines over 500 kg require industrial flooring and fastening with anchors. Benchtop models up to 100 kg can be installed on a robust workbench with an adequately sized surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50715439563080,"sku":"03-1192","price":4013.32,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Tornio_Bernardo_Profi_900_Vario_230_V_con_display_digitale_a_2_assi.jpg?v=1757329565"},{"product_id":"torni-bernardo-profi-900-vario-400v","title":"Metal Lathe Bernardo Profi 900 Vario \/ 400 V with DRO","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Profi 900 Vario \/ 400 V with DRO is a metal lathe for professional use, with a distance between centers of 900 mm, center height of 160 mm, and a weight of 240 kg (without base). Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDistance between centers: 900 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCenter height: 160 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSwing over bed: 320 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle bore: 38 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle nose: DIN 55029 D1-4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLathe speed: 75–500 \/ 300–2000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Profi 900 Vario \/ 400 V with DRO and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan turners use the Profi 900 Vario \/ 400 V with DRO for cylindrical and conical turning, and threading on steels and alloys. The machine supports the production of spare parts, shafts, bushings, and small series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Profi 900 Vario \/ 400 V with DRO is part of the Bernardo metal lathe range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the machine suitable for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Profi 900 Vario \/ 400 V with DRO for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Profi 900 Vario \/ 400 V with DRO is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan turners\u003c\/strong\u003e: cylindrical and conical turning, and threading on steels and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIndustrial maintenance technicians and repair centers\u003c\/strong\u003e: processing of spare parts, shafts, bushings, and small production runs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHobbyists and model making\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine; for occasional home use, consider smaller benchtop models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools, and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e900 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCenter height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle nose\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN 55029 D1-4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–500 \/ 300–2000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwing over bed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle bore\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLongitudinal feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.07 – 1.0 mm\/rev (15 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCross feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.017 – 0.25 mm\/rev (15 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetric threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.2 – 3.5 mm (18 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eImperial threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 – 56 TPI (21 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock quill travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1650 x 650 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e240 kg (without base)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe motor S1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW \/ 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe motor S6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW \/ 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat materials can the Profi 900 Vario \/ 400 V with DRO work on?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMild steels, alloy steels, cast iron, brass, and aluminum within the cutting limits indicated in the technical specifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor hardened or high-strength alloy steels, it is advisable to reduce cutting speed and depth of cut. The machine is sized for general mechanical production; for special alloys, verify the compatibility of the spindle and tailstock Morse taper.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is included in the standard equipment?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe equipment includes a self-centering chuck, tailstock, steady rest, threading accessories, and a set of wrenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the exact list of accessories and spare parts provided, consult the manufacturer's technical sheet. Krollit provides support for original Bernardo spare parts with delivery times of 3-5 working days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the voltage data in the technical table. Compact benchtop machines are often 230 V single-phase, professional models 400 V three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor 400 V three-phase models, an industrial power line is required. Verify the presence of adequate power supply in the workshop before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the machine suitable for series production?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the model class: professional Bernardo lathes handle continuous cycles, while benchtop models are suitable for medium use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfi and Apollo models are designed for intensive multi-shift use; Hobby and Goliath series for occasional use or small workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies significantly by model: see the \"Weight\" entry in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachines over 500 kg require industrial flooring and anchoring with bolts. Benchtop models up to 100 kg are installed on a sturdy workbench with an adequately sized surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50715439726920,"sku":"03-1194","price":4013.32,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_Tornio_Profi_900_Vario_con_display_digitale_2_assi.jpg?v=1757340487"},{"product_id":"proficenter-880-g-vario-400-v","title":"Bernardo Proficenter 880 G Vario Metal Lathe \/ 400 V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Proficenter 880 G Vario \/ 400 V is a metal lathe for professional use, with a distance between centers of 880 mm, a center height of 160 mm, and a weight of 318 kg (without base). Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDistance between centers: 880 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCenter height: 160 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSwing over bed: 320 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle bore: 38 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle nose: DIN 55029 D1-4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLathe speed: 75–435 \/ 400–2250 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Proficenter 880 G Vario \/ 400 V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan turners use the Proficenter 880 G Vario \/ 400 V for cylindrical turning, conical turning, and threading operations on steels and alloys. The machine supports the production of spare parts, shafts, bushings, and small series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Proficenter 880 G Vario \/ 400 V is part of Bernardo's range of metal lathes, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Proficenter 880 G Vario \/ 400 V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Proficenter 880 G Vario \/ 400 V is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan turners\u003c\/strong\u003e: cylindrical turning, conical turning, and threading on steels and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIndustrial maintainers and repair centers\u003c\/strong\u003e: machining of spare parts, shafts, bushings, and small-scale production.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHobbyists and model making\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for occasional home use, consider smaller benchtop models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMachining capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock quill travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity milling machine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFace milling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 63 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd milling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e880 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCenter height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle nose\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN 55029 D1-4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–435 \/ 400–2250 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling machine speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50–2250 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling spindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slot width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling head tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e-90° to +90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1660 x 650 x 1090 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e318 kg (without base)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe motor S1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW \/ 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe motor S6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW \/ 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling motor S1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.60 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling motor S6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.90 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwing over bed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle bore\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLongitudinal feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.07 – 1.0 mm\/rev (15 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCross feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.017 – 0.25 mm\/rev (15 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetric threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.2 – 3.5 mm (18 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eImperial threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 – 56 TPI (21 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVertical head adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat materials can the Proficenter 880 G Vario \/ 400 V work on?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMild steels, alloy steels, cast iron, brass, and aluminum within the pass limits indicated in the technical specifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor hardened or high-strength alloy steels, it is advisable to reduce cutting speed and depth of cut. The machine is sized for general mechanical production; for special alloys, check the compatibility of the spindle and tailstock Morse taper.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is included in the standard equipment?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe equipment includes a self-centering chuck, tailstock, steady rest, threading accessories, and a set of wrenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the exact list of accessories and spare parts supplied, consult the manufacturer's technical data sheet. Krollit provides support for original Bernardo spare parts with delivery times of 3-5 working days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the voltage data in the technical table. Compact benchtop machines are often 230 V single-phase, professional models 400 V three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor 400 V three-phase models, an industrial power line is required. Check for adequate power supply in the workshop before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the machine suitable for series production?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the model class: professional Bernardo lathes handle continuous cycles, benchtop models are suitable for medium use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfi and Apollo models are designed for intensive multi-shift use; Hobby and Goliath series for occasional use or small workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies significantly by model: see \"Weight\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachines over 500 kg require industrial flooring and anchoring with bolts. Benchtop models up to 100 kg are installed on a sturdy workbench with an adequately sized top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50715443953992,"sku":"03-1231","price":5073.66,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Centro_di_lavoro_Bernardo_Proficenter_880_G_Vario_tornio-fresatrice.jpg?v=1758816467"},{"product_id":"torni-bernardo-proficenter-880g-vario-400v-dro","title":"Bernardo Proficenter 880 G Vario Metal Lathe \/ 400 V with DRO","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Proficenter 880 G Vario \/ 400 V with DRO is a metal lathe for professional use, with a distance between centers of 880 mm, center height of 160 mm, and a weight of 318 kg (without base). Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDistance between centers: 880 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCenter height: 160 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSwing over bed: 320 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle bore: 38 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle mount: DIN 55029 D1-4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLathe speed: 75–435 \/ 400–2250 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Proficenter 880 G Vario \/ 400 V with DRO and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan turners use the Proficenter 880 G Vario \/ 400 V with DRO for cylindrical, conical turning and threading operations on steels and alloys. The machine supports the production of spare parts, shafts, bushings, and small series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Proficenter 880 G Vario \/ 400 V with DRO is part of the Bernardo range of metal lathes, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performance: to choose the machine suitable for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Proficenter 880 G Vario \/ 400 V with DRO for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Proficenter 880 G Vario \/ 400 V with DRO is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan turners\u003c\/strong\u003e: cylindrical, conical turning and threading on steels and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIndustrial maintenance technicians and repair centers\u003c\/strong\u003e: processing of spare parts, shafts, bushings, and small production.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHobbyists and model making\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for occasional home use, consider smaller bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMachining capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock quill travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity (milling machine)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFace milling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 63 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd milling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e880 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCenter height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle mount\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN 55029 D1-4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–435 \/ 400–2250 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling machine speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50–2250 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling spindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slot width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling head tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e-90° to +90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1660 x 650 x 1090 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e318 kg (without base)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe motor S1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW \/ 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe motor S6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW \/ 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling machine motor S1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.60 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling machine motor S6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.90 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwing over bed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle bore\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLongitudinal feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.07 – 1.0 mm\/rev (15 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCross feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.017 – 0.25 mm\/rev (15 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetric threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.2 – 3.5 mm (18 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInch threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 – 56 TPI (21 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVertical head adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat materials can the Proficenter 880 G Vario \/ 400 V with DRO work on?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMild steels, alloy steels, cast iron, brass and aluminum within the pass limits indicated in the technical specifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor hardened or high-strength alloy steels, it is advisable to reduce cutting speed and depth of cut. The machine is sized for general mechanical production; for special alloys, check the compatibility of the spindle and tailstock Morse taper.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is included in the standard equipment?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe equipment includes a self-centering chuck, tailstock, steady rest, threading accessories and wrench set.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the exact list of accessories and spare parts supplied, consult the manufacturer's technical data sheet. Krollit provides support for original Bernardo spare parts with delivery times of 3-5 working days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the voltage data in the technical table. Compact bench machines are often 230 V single-phase, professional models 400 V three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor 400 V three-phase models, an industrial power line is required. Verify the presence of adequate power supply in the workshop before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the machine suitable for series production?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the model class: Bernardo professional lathes handle continuous cycles, while bench models are suitable for medium use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfi and Apollo models are designed for intensive multi-shift use; Hobby and Goliath series for occasional use or small workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWeight varies significantly by model: see the \"Weight\" entry in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachines over 500 kg require industrial flooring and fixing with anchors. Bench models up to 100 kg are installed on a sturdy workbench with an adequately sized top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50715444150600,"sku":"03-1232","price":5711.75,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_Proficenter_880_G_Vario_con_DRO_a_2_assi_e_mandrino_160_mm.jpg?v=1757279565"},{"product_id":"torni-bernardo-proficenter-900-vario-230v-dro","title":"Bernardo Proficenter 900 Vario Metal Lathe \/ 230 V with DRO","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Proficenter 900 Vario \/ 230 V with DRO is a metal lathe for professional use, with a distance between centers of 900 mm, center height of 160 mm, and a weight of 303 kg (without base). Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDistance between centers: 900 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCenter height: 160 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSwing over bed: 320 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle bore: 38 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle nose: DIN 55029 D1-4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLathe speed: 75–500 \/ 300–2000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Proficenter 900 Vario \/ 230 V with DRO and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shops and artisan turners use the Proficenter 900 Vario \/ 230 V with DRO for cylindrical, conical, and thread turning operations on steels and alloys. The machine supports the production of spare parts, shafts, bushings, and small series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Proficenter 900 Vario \/ 230 V with DRO is part of the Bernardo metal lathe range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from the Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Proficenter 900 Vario \/ 230 V with DRO for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Proficenter 900 Vario \/ 230 V with DRO is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMachine shops and artisan turners\u003c\/strong\u003e: cylindrical, conical, and thread turning on steels and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIndustrial maintenance technicians and repair centers\u003c\/strong\u003e: processing of spare parts, shafts, bushings, and small-scale production.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHobbyists and model making\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for occasional home use, consider smaller bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMachining capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock quill travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling drilling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFace milling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 63 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd milling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e900 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCenter height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle nose\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN 55029 D1-4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–500 \/ 300–2000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50–2250 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling spindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slot width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling head tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e-90° to +90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1650 x 650 x 1120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e303 kg (without base)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe motor S1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLathe motor S6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling motor S1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.60 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilling motor S6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.90 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwing over bed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle bore\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLongitudinal feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.07 – 1.0 mm\/rev (15 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCross feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.017 – 0.25 mm\/rev (15 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetric threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.2 – 3.5 mm (18 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInch threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 – 56 TPI (21 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVertical head adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat materials can the Proficenter 900 Vario \/ 230 V with DRO process?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMild steels, alloy steels, cast iron, brass, and aluminum within the cutting limits indicated in the technical specifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor hardened or high-strength alloy steels, it is advisable to reduce cutting speed and depth of cut. The machine is sized for general mechanical production; for special alloys, check spindle and tailstock Morse taper compatibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is included in the standard equipment?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe equipment includes a self-centering chuck, tailstock, steady rest, threading accessories, and a set of wrenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the exact list of accessories and spare parts provided, consult the manufacturer's technical data sheet. Krollit provides support for original Bernardo spare parts with delivery times of 3-5 business days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the voltage data in the technical table. Compact bench machines are often 230 V single-phase, professional models 400 V three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor 400 V three-phase models, an industrial electrical line is required. Verify the presence of adequate power supply in the workshop before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the machine suitable for series production?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the model class: professional Bernardo lathes handle continuous cycles, bench lathes are suitable for medium use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfi and Apollo models are designed for intensive multi-shift use; Hobby and Goliath series for occasional use or small workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWeight varies significantly by model: see the \"Weight\" entry in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachines above 500 kg require industrial flooring and fixing with anchor bolts. Bench models up to 100 kg are installed on a sturdy workbench with an adequately sized top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50715444511048,"sku":"03-1237","price":5102.21,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Centro_di_lavoro_Bernardo_Proficenter_900_Vario_230_V_con_DRO.png?v=1758815996"},{"product_id":"torni-bernardo-profi-550lz-230v","title":"Bernardo Profi 550 LZ Lathe \/ 230 V – Compact and precise","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo Geared Lathe with Gap Bed Profi 550 LZ \/ 230 V\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Profi 550 LZ \/ 230 V lathe is a compact and reliable model, designed for precision machining in workshops and training laboratories. Equipped with a lead screw and feed rod, it offers stability and versatility even for complex jobs. With a 26 mm spindle bore, induction-hardened bed, and ground guides, it guarantees long life and constant precision. The continuously variable speed from 50 to 2000 rpm allows it to adapt to different materials, while the spindle, mounted on high-quality tapered bearings, ensures concentricity of ≤0.015 mm. Suitable for turning, metric and imperial threading, it comes complete with a self-centering chuck, tool post, and professional accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e Spindle bore Ø 26 mm with MT4 taper\u003cbr\u003e Induction-hardened and ground bed\u003cbr\u003e Continuous speed 50–2000 rpm\u003cbr\u003e Automatic longitudinal and cross feeds\u003cbr\u003e Metric threads (0.2–3.5 mm) and imperial threads (8–56 TPI)\u003cbr\u003e MT2 tailstock with 75 mm travel\u003cbr\u003e Motor 0.75 kW (S1) – 1.0 kW (S6) at 230 V\u003cbr\u003e Low weight of 130 kg, also suitable for small workshops\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable class=\"w-fit min-w-(--thread-content-width)\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfi 550 LZ\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e550 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCenter height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwing over bed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBed width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e135 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle bore\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e26 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVariable speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50–1000 \/ 100–2000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLongitudinal feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.08 – 0.48 mm\/rev (6 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCross feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.026 – 0.156 mm\/rev (6 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetric threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.2 – 3.5 mm (18 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eImperial threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 – 56 TPI (21 steps)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock quill travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slot width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.75 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.0 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1150 x 600 x 460 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e130 kg (without base)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ch3\u003eStandard Equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e 3-jaw self-centering chuck Ø125 mm with flange\u003cbr\u003e Fixed centers\u003cbr\u003e 4-way tool post\u003cbr\u003e Change gears\u003cbr\u003e Safety clutch\u003cbr\u003e Micrometric longitudinal stop\u003cbr\u003e Cross slide with swivel support\u003cbr\u003e Digital speed display\u003cbr\u003e Thread dial\u003cbr\u003e Spindle guard and splash guard\u003cbr\u003e Lead screw cover\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 working days (7 days to the South). Original spare parts available with 3–5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between the Profi 550 and the Profi 550\/700 models of the same series?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe number in the name indicates the distance between centers in mm — the maximum turning length of the workpiece. Profi 550 mm. The 26 mm spindle bore indicates the maximum diameter of the bar that can pass through the spindle bore without turning. The G geared change provides more torque at low speeds compared to belt versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow does the G geared change work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Profi 550 uses geared change (G) for speed variation: more torque at low speeds compared to belt variators, suitable for hard steels and large sections. Shifting occurs from standstill with the external lever — no belt disassembly required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003e230 V power supply: is a transformer needed for the Profi 550?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e230 V single-phase — connects directly to a standard Italian industrial socket (Schuko 16A). No transformer or three-phase panel required. Suitable for private workshops, workshops without a three-phase system, and vocational schools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50715912110408,"sku":"03-1144","price":2793.09,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_Tornio_per_metallo_Profi_550_LZ_230V_con_display_digitale_e_avanzamenti_automatici.jpg?v=1756218048"},{"product_id":"tornio-bernardo-profi-880g-vario-230v","title":"Bernardo Precision Profi 880 G Vario Lathe \/ 230 V – Powerful and Versatile","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBernardo Precision Profi 880 G Vario \/ 230 V Lathe\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Precision Profi 880 G Vario \/ 230 V lathe is designed for demanding professionals and hobbyists seeking precision and reliability. With a 38 mm spindle bore, an induction-hardened bed, and a continuous speed range from 75 to 2250 rpm, it ensures high performance even under heavy loads. Suitable for machining steel, non-ferrous metals, and plastic, it allows for universal operations such as longitudinal turning, facing, profiling, and threading. The presence of a Delta inverter ensures high torque at low speeds, while P5 tapered roller bearings guarantee long life and high precision. Complete with professional accessories, it is suitable for mechanical workshops and laboratories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMain Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e Spindle bore Ø 38 mm\u003cbr\u003e Induction-hardened and ground bed\u003cbr\u003e Continuous speed 75 – 2250 rpm with Delta inverter\u003cbr\u003e Metric threads (0.2 – 3.5 mm) and imperial threads (8 – 56 TPI)\u003cbr\u003e High-precision P5 tapered roller bearings\u003cbr\u003e Tailstock with quick lock and 100 mm travel\u003cbr\u003e Motor power 1.5 kW (S1) – 2.2 kW (S6)\u003cbr\u003e Robust structure, weight 255 kg\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable class=\"w-fit min-w-(--thread-content-width)\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBernardo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfi 880 G Vario\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e880 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCenter height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwing over bed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle bore\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle mount\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN 55029, D1-4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVariable speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–435 \/ 400–2250 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLongitudinal feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.07 – 1.0 mm\/rev\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCross feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.017 – 0.25 mm\/rev\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetric threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.2 – 3.5 mm (18 pitches)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eImperial threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 – 56 TPI (21 pitches)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock quill travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW \/ 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1660 x 650 x 570 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e255 kg (without base)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e 3-jaw self-centering chuck Ø 160 mm\u003cbr\u003e Fixed centers\u003cbr\u003e Change gears for threading\u003cbr\u003e 4-way tool post\u003cbr\u003e Safety clutch\u003cbr\u003e Micrometric longitudinal stop\u003cbr\u003e Cross slide with swivel top slide\u003cbr\u003e Delta frequency inverter\u003cbr\u003e Digital speed indicator\u003cbr\u003e Threading dial\u003cbr\u003e LED work light\u003cbr\u003e Spindle guard and splash guard\u003cbr\u003e Leadscrew cover\u003cbr\u003e Set of tools and service wrenches\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping: 5–9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). Original spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between the Profi 880 and the Profi 550\/700 models in the same series?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe number in the name indicates the distance between centers in mm — the maximum turnable workpiece length. Profi 550 mm. The 38 mm spindle bore indicates the maximum diameter of the bar that can pass through the spindle bore without turning. The Vario variator adds continuous speed adjustment compared to standard models in the same range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat changes with the Vario electronic variator?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe electronic variator (Vario) allows for continuous speed adjustment without stopping the machine — you can switch from roughing to finishing by turning a knob in 2 seconds. Torque remains high even at low speeds, unlike mechanical belt variators. On the Profi 880, it covers the full range indicated in the table without steps.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003e230 V power supply: is a transformer needed for the Profi 880?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e230 V single-phase — connects directly to the standard Italian industrial socket (Schuko 16A). No transformer or three-phase panel needed. Suitable for private laboratories, workshops without a three-phase system, and vocational schools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal spare parts available with 3–5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50715924889928,"sku":"03-1184","price":3916.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Tornio_Bernardo_Precision_Profi_880_G_Vario_con_inverter_e_accessori.jpg?v=1758795495"}],"url":"https:\/\/www.krollit.com\/collections\/sale.oembed?page=2","provider":"Krollit","version":"1.0","type":"link"}